Trane Uni Fan Coil And Force Flo Installation Maintenance Manual UNT SVX07D EN (27 Apr 2012)

2015-04-02

: Trane Trane-Uni-Fan-Coil-And-Force-Flo-Installation-And-Maintenance-Manual-684303 trane-uni-fan-coil-and-force-flo-installation-and-maintenance-manual-684303 trane pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 138

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 1 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation, Operation,
and Maintenance

UniTrane™ Fan-Coil and Force-Flo™ Air Conditioners
200 to 1,200 cfm

Models FC and FF
“ZO” and later design sequence
Low vertical models FCKB and FCLB “SO” and later design sequence

SAFETY WARNING
Only qualified personnel should install and service the equipment. The installation, starting up, and
servicing of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment can be hazardous and requires specific
knowledge and training. Improperly installed, adjusted or altered equipment by an unqualified person could
result in death or serious injury. When working on the equipment, observe all precautions in the literature
and on the tags, stickers, and labels that are attached to the equipment.

April 2012

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 2 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Warnings, Cautions and Notices
Warnings, Cautions and Notices. Note that warnings,
cautions and notices appear at appropriate intervals
throughout this manual. Warnings are provide to alert
installing contractors to potential hazards that could result
in death or personal injury. Cautions are designed to alert
personnel to hazardous situations that could result in
personal injury, while notices indicate a situation that
could result in equipment or property-damage-only
accidents.
Your personal safety and the proper operation of this
machine depend upon the strict observance of these
precautions.
Read this manual thoroughly before operating or servicing
this unit.
ATTENTION: Warnings, Cautions and Notices appear at

appropriate sections throughout this literature. Read
these carefully:
Indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous
CAUTIONs situation which, if not avoided, could
result in minor or moderate injury. It
could also be used to alert against
unsafe practices.
Indicates a situation that could result in
NOTICE: equipment or property-damage only

WARNING

must also be adhered to for responsible management of
refrigerants. Know the applicable laws and follow them.
This product uses an electronic variable speed motor
control, which includes a line reactor to minimize power
line harmonic currents. It is recommended that good
wiring practices be followed to manage building electrical
power system harmonic voltages and currents to avoid
electrical system problems or other equipment
interaction.

WARNING
Proper Field Wiring and Grounding
Required!
All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified
personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field
wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To
avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for
field wiring installation and grounding as described in
NEC and your local/state electrical codes. Failure to
follow code could result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
Required!
Installing/servicing this unit could result in exposure to
electrical, mechanical and chemical hazards.
•

Before installing/servicing this unit, technicians
MUST put on all Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
recommended for the work being undertaken.
ALWAYS refer to appropriate MSDS sheets and OSHA
guidelines for proper PPE.

•

When working with or around hazardous chemicals,
ALWAYS refer to the appropriate MSDS sheets and
OSHA guidelines for information on allowable
personal exposure levels, proper respiratory
protection and handling recommendations.

•

If there is a risk of arc or flash, technicians MUST put
on all Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) in
accordance with NFPA 70E or other country-specific
requirements for arc flash protection, PRIOR to
servicing the unit.

Important
Environmental Concerns!
Scientific research has shown that certain man-made
chemicals can affect the earth’s naturally occurring
stratospheric ozone layer when released to the
atmosphere. In particular, several of the identified
chemicals that may affect the ozone layer are refrigerants
that contain Chlorine, Fluorine and Carbon (CFCs) and
those containing Hydrogen, Chlorine, Fluorine and
Carbon (HCFCs). Not all refrigerants containing these
compounds have the same potential impact to the
environment. Trane advocates the responsible handling of
all refrigerants-including industry replacements for CFCs
such as HCFCs and HFCs.

Responsible Refrigerant Practices!

Failure to follow recommendations could result in death
or serious injury.

Trane believes that responsible refrigerant practices are
important to the environment, our customers, and the air
conditioning industry. All technicians who handle
refrigerants must be certified. The Federal Clean Air Act
(Section 608) sets forth the requirements for handling,
reclaiming, recovering and recycling of certain
refrigerants and the equipment that is used in these
service procedures. In addition, some states or
municipalities may have additional requirements that

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 3 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Warnings, Cautions and Notices

Revision History
The revision of this literature dated 27 Apr 2012 includes
information for Tracer™ UC400 controls.

Trademarks
Force-Flo, Rover, Tracer, Tracer Summit, Trane, the Trane
logo, and UniTrane are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Trane in the United States and other
countries. All trademarks referenced in this document are
the trademarks of their respective owners.
Echelon, LonTalk, and LONWORKS are registered
trademarks of Echelon Corporation; Energizer is a
registered trademark of Eveready Battery Company, Inc.;
Loctite is a registered trademark of Henkel Corporation.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 4 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Table of Contents
Warnings, Cautions and Notices . . . . . . . . . . 2

Horizontal Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Model Number Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Cabinet Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Recessed Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Pre-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Receiving and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Installation—Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Jobsite Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installation Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Service Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Pre-Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Installing Wall-Mounted Wired Sensors . .46
Location Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Available Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Location Considerations for Wireless zone
sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Factory-Installed Piping Packages . . . . . 15

Fan Mode Switch Installation . . . . . . . . . .47

Vertical Concealed, Model A . . . . . . . . . . 16

Zone Sensor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Vertical Cabinet, Model B . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Installation—Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Horizontal Concealed, Model C . . . . . . . . 18

Unit Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Horizontal Cabinet, Model D . . . . . . . . . . 19

Supply Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Horizontal Recessed, Model E . . . . . . . . . 20

Electrical Grounding Restrictions . . . . . . .49

Vertical Wall Hung Cabinet, Model F (ForceFlo Units Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Wall-Mounted Control Interconnection Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Vertical Recessed, Model H . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Vertical Slope Top, Model J . . . . . . . . . . 23
Low Vertical Concealed, Model K . . . . . . 24
Low Vertical Cabinet, Model L . . . . . . . . 25
Inverted Vertical Cabinet, Model M
(Force-Flo Units Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Inverted Vertical Recessed, Model N (ForceFlo Units Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

ECM Overview and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Trane BLDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
ECM Engine Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Standard Adapter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
CSTI Adapter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Compact Concealed, Model P . . . . . . . . . 28

Installation and Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Fan-Coil Coil Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Installation and Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . .55

Force-Flo Coil Connections . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Adjustment and Configuration of the Engine
Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Fresh Air Opening Locations . . . . . . . . . . 32
Wall Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Projection Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Installation—Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Duct Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Piping Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Installation—General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Installing the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Vertical Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4

Control Options (Including Factory-Installed)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Initial Setup and Configuration . . . . . . . . .63

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Configuring the ECM Engine Controller . .63
Configuring the ECM Engine Board . . . . .68

Wired Controllers—Communication Wiring 73
Wiring Installation (ZN510 and ZN520) . . .73
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 5 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Recommended Communication Wiring Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Wiring Installation (Tracer UC400) . . . . . . 73

Discharge Air Tempering (UC400) . . . . .100
Heating or Cooling Mode (UC400) . . . . .100

Wiring Overview Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Entering Water Temperature Sampling Function (UC400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Fan Operation (UC400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

BACnet MS/TP Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Exhaust Control (UC400) . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Valve Operation (UC400) . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Wireless Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Modulating Outdoor/Return Air Damper
(UC400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Observing the Receiver for Readiness to Associate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Associating the Sensor to the Receiver . 78
Testing Signal Strength and Battery Status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Configuring the Wireless Display Sensor
(Model WDS only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Two-position Control Of A Modulating Outdoor Air Damper (UC400) . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Electric Heat Operation (UC400) . . . . . . .103
Dehumidification Operation (UC400) . . .103
Peer-to-peer Communication (UC400) . .104
Unit Protection Strategies (UC400) . . . . .104

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Sensor Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Wireless Sensor Specifications . . . . . . . . 85

Replacing Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

Pre-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Periodic Maintenance Checklists . . . . . .110

Pre-Startup Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Tracer ZN510 and ZN520 Unit Startup . . 88

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Output Testing and Diagnostics (Tracer
ZN520) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Tracer UC400 Unit Startup . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Output Testing and Diagnostics (UC400) .115

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Output Testing (UC400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Fan Mode Switch Operation . . . . . . . . . . 89

Diagnostics (UC400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Tracer ZN010 & ZN510 Operation . . . . . . 89

Troubleshooting (Wireless Controls) . . . .117

Tracer ZN520 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Troubleshooting (Tracer ZN520) . . . . . . .122

UC400 Controller Operation . . . . . . . . . . 89

Troubleshooting (UC400) . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Sequence of Operation: Tracer ZN010 and
ZN510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Troubleshooting (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Binary Inputs (Tracer ZN010 and ZN510) 90

Troubleshooting Information (ECM) . . .126

Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Binary Outputs (Tracer ZN010 and ZN510) 90

Tracer ZN520 Sequence of Operation . . . 92
Cooling Operation (Tracer ZN520) . . . . . 93

General Information (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . .126

Replacing ECM Components . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Circuit Modules Replacement Notes/Work Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Fan Mode Operation (Tracer ZN520) . . . 94

ECM Application Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

UC400 Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . 99

Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Power-up Sequence (UC400) . . . . . . . . . 99
Random Start (UC400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Occupancy Modes (UC400) . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Timed Override Control (UC400) . . . . . 100
Zone Temperature Control (UC400) . . . 100
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 6 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Model Number Descriptions
UniTrane Fan-Coil

Digit 9 — Piping System/
Placement

Following is a complete description
of the fan-coil model number. Each
digit in the model number has a
corresponding code that identifies
specific unit options.

A =
Drain

Note: Not all options are available
on all cabinet styles. Contact
your local Trane sales
representative for more
information.
Fan-Coil

Digit 3 — Cabinet Type
A
B
C
D
E
H
J
P

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

E =
Drain
F =
Drain

Digits 1, 2 — Unit Type
FC =

B =
Drain

Vertical Concealed
Vertical Cabinet
Horizontal Concealed
Horizontal Cabinet
Horizontal Recessed
Vertical Recessed
Vertical Cabinet Slope Top
Compact Concealed

Digit 4 — Development
Sequence “B”
Digits 5, 6, 7 — Unit Size
020

040

080

030

060

100

120

Digit 8 — Unit Voltage
1

115/60/1

230/60/1

208/60/1

220/50/1

277/60/1

J
K
L

=
=
=

M =

No piping, RH, No Auxiliary
Pan
No piping, LH, No Auxiliary
Pan
No piping, RH, with Auxiliary
Drain Pan
No piping, LH, with Auxiliary
Drain Pan
No piping, RH, No Auxiliary
Pan, Extended End Pocket
No piping, LH, No Auxiliary
Pan, Extended End Pocket
No piping, RH, with Auxiliary
Drain Pan, Extended End Pocket
No piping, LH, with Auxiliary
Drain Pan, Extended End Pocket
With piping package, RH
With piping package, LH
With piping package, RH,
Extended End Pocket
With piping package, LH,
Extended End Pocket

Digits 10, 11 — Design
Sequence
Digit 12 — Inlets
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
K
L

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Front Toe Space
Front Bar Grille
Front Stamped Louver
Bottom Stamped Louver
Bottom Toe Space
Back Duct Collar
Back Open Return
Back Stamped Louver
Exposed fan (Model P only)
Bottom filter (Model P only)

Digit 13 — Fresh Air Damper
0 = None
A = Manual, Bottom Opening
B = Manual, Back Opening
C = Manual, Top Opening
D = Auto, 2-Position, Bottom
Opening
E = Auto, 2-Position, Back Opening
F = Auto, 2-Position, Top Opening
G = Auto, Economizer, Bottom
Opening
H = Auto, Economizer, Back Opening
J = Auto, Economizer, Top Opening
K = No Damper, Bottom Opening
L = No Damper, Back Opening
M = No Damper, Top Opening

Digit 15 — Color
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

No Paint (Concealed Units Only)
Deluxe Beige
Soft Dove
Cameo White
Driftwood Grey
Stone Grey
Rose Mauve

Digit 16 — Tamperproof Locks/
Leveling Feet
0
B
C
D
F

=
=
=
=
=

None
Keylock Access Door
Keylock Panel and Access Door
Leveling Feet
Keylock Access Door with
Leveling Feet
Keylock Panel and Access Door
with Leveling Feet

Digit 17 — Motor
A
B

=
=

Free Discharge ECM
High Static ECM

Digit 18 — Coil
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

M =
P

X =
Heat
Y =
Heat
Z =
Heat

2-Row Cooling/Heating1
3-Row Cooling/Heating1
4-Row Cooling/Heating1
2-Row Cooling/1-Row Heating
2-Row Cooling/2-Row Heating
3-Row Cooling/1-Row Heating
2-Row Cooling Only
3-Row Cooling Only
4-Row Cooling Only
2-Row Cooling/Heating1 with
Electric Heat
3-Row Cooling/Heating1 with
Electric Heat
4-Row Cooling/Heating1 with
Electric Heat
2-Row Cooling/Heating1 with
1-Row Heating
2-Row Cooling/Heating1 with
2-Row Heating
3-Row Cooling/Heating1 with
1-Row Heating
2-Row Cooling Only, Electric
3-Row Cooling Only, Electric
4-Row Cooling Only, Electric

Digit 19 — Drain Pan Material
3
4

=
=

Polymer Drain Pan
Stainless Steel Main Drain Pan

Digit 20 — Coil Air Vent
A =
M =

Automatic Air Vent
Manual Air Vent

Digit 14 — Outlets
A
B
C
D
G
H
J

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Front Duct Collar
Front Bar Grille
Front Stamped Louver
Front Quad Grille
Top Quad Grille
Top Bar Grille
Top Duct Collar

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 7 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Model Number Descriptions
Digits 21, 22, 23 — Electric Heat
kW — ( ) = 208V Derate
000 =
010 =
015 =
020 =
025 =
030 =
040 =
050 =
060 =
070 =
080 =
100 =

No Electric Heat
1.0 kW (0.75 kW)
1.5 kW (1.1 kW)
2.0 kW (1.5 kW)
2.5 kW (1.9 kW)
3.0 kW (2.3 kW)
4.0 kW (3.0 kW)
5.0 kW (3.8 kW)
6.0 kW (4.5 kW)
7.0 kW (5.3 kW)
8.0 kW (6.0 kW)
10.0 kW

Digit 24 — Reheat Coil
0
A
B
D

=
=
=
=

None
Steam Coil
Hot Water Coil
High Capacity Hot Water Coil

Digit 25 — Disconnect Switch
0
D

=
=

None
Disconnect Switch

Digit 26 — Filter
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
A =
B =
C =
Extras
D =
Extras

None
1” Throwaway Filter
1” Throwaway MERV 8 Filter
1” Throwaway, 1 Extra
1” Throwaway MERV 8, 1 Extra
1” Throwaway, 2 Extras
1” Throwaway MERV 8, 2 Extras
1” Throwaway, 3 Extras
1” Throwaway MERV 8, 3 Extras
1” Throwaway MERV 13 Filter
1” Throwaway MERV 13, 1 Extra
1” Throwaway MERV 13, 2
1” Throwaway MERV 13, 3

Digit 27 — Main Control Valve

Digit 29 — Piping Packages

0 = None
A = 2-Way, 2-Position, NO (30 psig)
B = 3-Way, 2-Position, NO (28 psig)
C = 2-Way, 2-Position, NC (30 psig)
D = 3-Way, 2-Position, NC (20 psig)
E = 2-Way, 2-Position, NO (50 psig)
F = 3-Way, 2-Position, NO (28 psig)
G = 2-Way, 2-Position, NC (50 psig)
H = 3-Way, 2-Position, NC (28 psig)
J = 2-Way, Mod., 0.6 Cv (60 psig)
K = 3-Way, Mod., 0.6 Cv (60 psig)
L = 2-Way, Mod., 1.1 Cv (60 psig)
M = 3-Way, Mod., 1.1 Cv (60 psig)
N = 2-Way, Mod., 2.3 Cv (60 psig)
P = 3-Way, Mod., 2.7 Cv (60 psig)
Q = 2-Way, Mod., 3.3Cv (60 psig)
R = 3-Way, Mod., 3.8 Cv (60 psig)
X = Field-supplied, NO
Y = Field-supplied, NC
Z = Field-supplied 3-Wire
Modulating
1 = Field supplied analog valve

0
A

=
=

Digit 28 — Auxiliary Control
Valve

Digit 31 — Control Option

0 = None
A = 2-Way, 2-Position, NO (30 psig)
B = 3-Way, 2-Position, NC (28 psig)
C = 2-Way, 2-Position, NC (30 psig)
D = 3-Way, 2-Position, NC (20 psig)
E = 2-Way, 2-Position, NO (50 psig)
F = 3-Way, 2-Position, NO (28 psig)
G = 2-Way, 2-Position, NC (50 psig)
H = 3-Way, 2-Position, NC (28 psig)
J = 2-Way, Mod., 0.6 Cv (60 psig)
K = 3-Way, Mod., 0.6 Cv (60 psig)
L = 2-Way, Mod., 1.1 Cv (60 psig)
M = 3-Way, Mod., 1.1 Cv (60 psig)
N = 2-Way, Mod., 2.3 Cv (60 psig)
P = 3-Way, Mod., 2.7 Cv (60 psig)
Q = 2-Way, Mod., 3.3Cv (60 psig)
R = 3-Way, Mod., 3.8 Cv (60 psig)
X = Field-supplied, NO
Y = Field-supplied, NC
Z = Field-supplied 3-Wire
Modulating
1 = Field supplied analog valve

None
Basic Ball Valve Supply and
Return
Basic Ball Valve Supply/Manual
Circuit Setter
Basic Ball Valve Supply and
Return with Auto Circuit Setter
Deluxe Ball Valve Supply and
Return
Deluxe Ball Valve Supply/Manual
Circuit Setter
Deluxe Ball Valve Supply and
Return with Auto Circuit Setter

Digit 30 — Control Type
A
E
F
G
H

=
=
=
=
=

D
K
V

=
=
=

W =
X

0
3

=
=

6
7

=
=

Fan Mode Switch
Tracer ZN010
Tracer ZN510
Tracer ZN520
Customer Supplied Terminal
Interface (CSTI)
Tracer UC400, Single Zone VAV
Unit-Mounted Fan Mode Switch
Wall-Mounted Fan Mode Switch
Unit-Mounted Fan Speed Switch
w/Setpoint Dial Zone Sensor
Wall-Mounted Fan Speed Switch
w/Setpoint Dial Zone Sensor
Unit-Mounted Fan Speed Switch
w/Wall-Mounted Setpoint Dial
Zone Sensor
Unit-Mounted Fan Speed Switch
& Wall-Mounted Setpoint Dial
w/Comm.
Unit-Mounted Fan Speed Switch,
On/Cancel, Setpoint Dial
w/ Comm.
Wall-Mounted On/Cancel
w/ Comm.
Wall-Mounted Fan Speed Switch,
Setpoint Dial, On/Cancel
w/ Comm.
Without Control Option
Unit-Mounted Low Voltage Fan
Speed Switch (Off /Hi /Med /Low)
Wall-Mounted Digital Zone
Sensor (OALMH, Setpoint,
On/Cancel, Comm Jack)
Wall-Mounted Digital Zone
Sensor (On/Cancel, Comm Jack)
Wireless Zone Sensor
Wireless Display Sensor, UnitMounted Receiver

Digit 32 — IAQ Options
0
1
4

=
=
=

Without IAQ Options
Dehumidification
Dehumidification w/ Sensor

Digit 33 —FLA Motor Option
0
A

=
=

Standard FLA ECM Mode
Reduced FLA ECM Mode

Designates coils provided with a changeover sensor.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 8 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Model Number Descriptions
Digit 34

Digit 42 — Subbases

0
A
B
C
D
E
F

None

Digit 35 — Control Function #3
0
2

=
=

None
Condensate Overflow Detection

Digit 36 — Control Function #4
0
2

=
=

None
Low Temperature Detection

Digits 37, 38 — Future Control
Functions
Digit 39 — Projection Panels
and Falsebacks
0
A

=
=

B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
Q
R
T

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

None
2” Subbase
3” Subbase
4” Subbase
5” Subbase
6” Subbase
7” Subbase

Digit 43 — Recessed Flange
0
A

=
=

None
Recessed Flange

Digit 44 — Wall Boxes
0
A

=
=

None
Anodized Wall Box

None
5/8” Standard Recessed Panel
(Vertical Recessed Units Only)
2” Projection Panel
2.5” Projection Panel
3” Projection Panel
3.5” Projection Panel
4” Projection Panel
4.5” Projection Panel
5” Projection Panel
5.5” Projection Panel
6” Projection Panel
2”Falseback
3” Falseback
4” Falseback
5” Falseback
6” Falseback
7” Falseback
8” Falseback

Digit 40 — Main Autoflow Gpm
0

None

3.5

0.5

4.0

0.75

4.5

1.0

5.0

1.5

M =

6.0

2.0

7.0

2.5

8.0

3.0

Digit 41 — Auxiliary Autoflow
Gpm
0

None

3.5

0.5

4.0

0.75

4.5

1.0

5.0

1.5

M =

6.0

2.0

7.0

2.5

8.0

3.0

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 9 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

General Information
UniTrane fan-coil and Force-Flo units are intended for
single zone applications. These units have load
capabilities of 200 to 1200 cfm. See Figure 1 for unit
components. Fan-coil units are available as two-pipe, with
or without electric heat (one hydronic circuit) or four-pipe
(two hydronic circuits). Force-Flo units feature two-pipe
hydronic, electric heat only, or steam only. Also, these
units feature a variety of factory mounted piping packages.

relays. The three-speed switch option, which ships
separately, comes with a low voltage (24 volt AC)
transformer.

Units with the three-speed fan switch only, are available
with the switch mounted on the unit, or shipped
separately, to be mounted in the occupied space. The unit
mounted three-speed switch option can be ordered with a
low voltage (24 vols AC) transformer and three fan speed

The controls interface option, includes a 24 volt AC
transformer, and an interface terminal board. Controls
provided by an external source can be tied into the
interface terminal board utilizing the integrated terminal
block with 3mm screw connections.

Figure 1.

The Tracer ZN010, ZN510, ZN520, and UC400 controllers
are included inside the units control box assembly. These
controllers utilize analog signals from a unit-mounted
control device or from a control device mounted in the
occupied space.

UniTrane fan-coil unit components (vertical cabinet model is shown)
Smaller unit footprint.
Quiet operation.

Two-, three-, or
four-row coils.

Factory-assembled, -installed,
and -tested piping package
with IAQ drain pan to collect
condensate.

Factory-installed and
-tested controls.

Removable, noncorrosive,
positively-sloped drain pan
that’s easy to clean.
Build in field service tool
with real language LED
Easy-to-remove fan assembly.

16-gage steel construction.
Easy filter access
without front panel
removal.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

Cleanable closed-cell
insulator (non-fiberglass).
Energy efficient
electronically
commutated motor (ECM) Damper allows up to 100% fresh air.

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 10 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Pre-Installation
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote
disconnects and discharge all motor start/run
capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/
tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be
inadvertently energized. For variable frequency drives
or other energy storing components provided by Trane
or others, refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s
literature for allowable waiting periods for discharge of
capacitors. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all
capacitors have discharged. Failure to disconnect
power and discharge capacitors before servicing could
result in death or serious injury.
For additional information regarding the safe discharge of
capacitors, see PROD-SVB06A-EN

Receiving and Handling
Upon delivery, inspect all components for possible
shipping damage. See “Receiving Checklist” (below) for
detailed instructions. Trane recommends leaving units
and accessories in their shipping packages/skids for
protection and ease of handling until installation.

Shipping Package
UniTrane fan-coil and Force-Flo cabinet heaters ship in
individual cartons for handling and storage ease. Each
carton has tagging information such as the model number,
sales order number, serial number, unit size, piping
connections, and unit style to help properly locate the unit
in the floor plan. If specified, the unit will ship with tagging
designated by the customer.

 Do not move damaged material from the receiving
location. It is the receiver’s responsibility to provide
reasonable evidence that concealed damage did not
occur after delivery.
 Do not continue unpacking the shipment if it appears
damaged. Retain all internal packing, cartons, and
crate. Take photos of damaged material.
 Notify the carrier’s terminal of the damage
immediately by phone and mail. Request an immediate
joint inspection of the damage by the carrier and
consignee.
 Notify your Trane representative of the damage and
arrange for repair. Have the carrier inspect the damage
before making any repairs to the unit.
 Compare the electrical data on the unit nameplate with
the ordering and shipping information to verify the
correct unit is received.

Jobsite Storage
This unit is intended for indoor use only. Store the unit
indoors to protect the unit from damage due to the
elements. If indoor storage is not possible, make the
following provisions for outdoor storage:
1. Place the unit(s) on a dry surface or raised off the
ground to assure adequate air circulation beneath unit
and to assure that no portion of the unit contacts
standing water at any time.
2. Cover the entire unit with a canvas tarp only. Do not
use clear, black or plastic tarps as they may cause
excessive moisture condensation and equipment
damage.

Receiving Checklist

Installation Preparation

Complete the following checklist immediately after
receiving unit shipment to detect possible shipping
damage.

Before installing the unit, consider the following unit
location recommendations to ensure proper unit
operation.

 Inspect individual cartons before accepting. Check for
rattles, bent carton corners, or other visible indications
of shipping damage.

1. Clearances: Allow adequate service and code
clearances as recommended in “Service Access” (the
next section). Position the unit and skid assembly in its
final location.

 If a unit appears damaged, inspect it immediately
before accepting the shipment. Manually rotate the fan
wheel to ensure it turns freely. Make specific notations
concerning the damage on the freight bill. Do not
refuse delivery.

2. Structural support: Ensure the structural support is
strong enough to adequately support the unit. The
installer is responsible for supply support rods for
installation of ceiling units.

 Inspect the unit for concealed damage before it is
stored and as soon as possible after delivery. Report
concealed damage to the freight line within the allotted
time after delivery. Check with the carrier for their
allotted time to submit a claim.

3. Level: Verify the floor or foundation is level. Shim or
repair as necessary. To ensure proper unit operation,
install the unit level (zero tolerance) in both horizontal
axes. Failure to level the unit properly can result in
condensate management problems, such as standing
water inside the unit.
4. Condensate line & piping: Consider coil piping and
condensate drain requirements. Verify condensate line

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 11 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Pre-Installation
is continuously pitched 1 inch per 10 feet of condensate
line run to adequately drain condensate.
5. Wall & ceiling openings: Vertical recessed/concealed
units require wall/ceiling openings. Refer to submittal
for specific dimensions before attempting to install.
Horizontal recessed/concealed units must meet the
requirements of the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) Standard 90A or 90B concerning
the use of concealed ceiling spaces as return air
plenums. Refer to the submittal for specific
dimensions of ceiling openings.
6. Exterior: Touch up painted panels if necessary. If
panels need paint, sanding is not necessary. However,
clean the surface of any oil, grease, or dirt residue so
the paint will adhere. Purchase factory approved touch
up epoxy paint from your local Trane Service Parts
Center and apply.

Pre-Installation Checklist
Complete the following checklist before beginning unit
installation.
 Verify the unit size and tagging with the unit nameplate.
 Make certain the floor or foundation is level, solid, and
sufficient to support the unit and accessory weights.
See “Dimensions and Weights,” p. 12. Level or repair
the floor before positioning the unit if necessary.
 Allow minimum recommended clearances for routine
maintenance and service. Refer to unit submittals for
dimensions.
 Allow one and one half fan diameters above the unit
before the discharge ductwork makes any turns.

Service Access
Service access is available from the front on vertical units
and from the bottom on horizontal units. Cabinet and
recessed units have removable front or bottom panels to
allow access into the unit. See Figure 2, p. 11 for
recommended service and operating clearances.
Figure 2.

Recommended service clearances

24"
12"
both sides
8.5"
both sides

3"
model B, vertical cabinet
model L, low vertical cabinet

model A, vertical concealed
model K, low vertical concealed
model H, vertical recessed
36"

12"
both sides

8.5"
both sides
24"
front discharge

28"

28"
model D, horizontal cabinet

model C, horizontal concealed
model E, horizontal recessed

Units have either right or left hand piping. Reference
piping locations by facing the front of the unit (airflow
discharges from the front). The control panel is always on
the end opposite the piping.
The fan board assembly and main drain pan are easily
removable for cleaning. See “Maintenance,” p. 106 for
more details on servicing.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 12 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights
Table 1.

Fan-coil component data

Unit Size

0.8

1.1

1.6

2.1

3.2

2-Row

15 x 1.7 x 8

20 x 1.7 x 8

29.5 x 1.7 x 8 38 x 1.7 x 8

57 x 1.7 x 8

3-Row

15 x 2.6 x 8

20 x 2.6 x 8

29.5 x 2.6 x 8 38 x 2.6 x 8

57 x 2.6 x 8

4-Row

15 x 3.5 x 8

20 x 3.5 x 8

29.5 x 3.5 x 8 38 x 3.5 x 8

57 x 3.5 x 8

Coil Data
Face Area — ft2
LxDxH — in.

Volume — gal
1-Row (Heat)

0.06

0.08

0.11

0.14

0.21

2-Row

0.12

0.15

0.22

0.28

0.42

3-Row

0.18

0.23

0.33

0.42

0.62

4-Row

0.24

0.30

0.44

0.56

0.83

144

Fins/ft
2-Row
3-Row

144

4-Row

144

1.6

2.4

Reheat Coil Data (1-Row), Standard or High-Capacity(a)
Hot Water or Steam
Face Area — ft2

0.6

0.8

1.2

L x D x H — in.

15 x 1.5 x 6

20 x 1.5 x 6

29.5 x 1.5 x 6 38 x 1.5 x 6

57 x 1.5 x 6

Volume — gal

0.12

0.15

0.22

0.28

0.42

Standard Capacity(a) Fins/ft

High-Capacity(a)

144

Fins/ft

Fan/Motor Data
Fan Quantity

Size — Dia” x Width”

6.31 x 4

6.31 x 6.5

6.31 x 7.5

6.31 x 6.5

6.31 x 7.5

(1) 6.31 x 7.5 6.31 x 7.5

Quantity

Size — in.

8-7/8 x 19-1/8 8-7/8 x 19-1/8 8-7/8 x 24-1/8 8-7/8 x 33-5/8 8-7/8 x 42-1/8 8-7/8 x 61-1/8 8-7/8 x 61-1/8

Size — Dia” x Width”
Motor Quantity

(2) 6.31 x 6.5

Filter Data
1” TA and Pl. Media

1” Fresh Air Filter (only on cabinet styles D, E, and H with bottom return and fresh air opening)
Quantity

Size — in

5-1/2 x 19-1/8 5-1/2 x 19-1/8 5-1/2 x 24-1/8 5-1/2 x 33-5/8 5-/2 x 42-1/8

5-1/2 x 61-1/8 5-1/2 x 61-1/8

(a) Standard and high-capacity reheat coils share the same component data except that standard capacity reheat coils have 48 fins/ft (1.6 fins/cm) while
high-capacity reheat coils have 144 fins/ft (4.7 fins/cm).

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 13 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights
Table 2.

Low vertical fan-coil component data

Unit Size

1.1

1.6

2.1

2-Row

20 x 1.7 x 8

29.5 x 1.7 x 8

38 x 1.7 x 8

3-Row

20 x 2.6 x 8

29.5 x 2.6 x 8

38 x 2.6 x 8

Coil Data
Face Area — ft2
L x D x H — in.

Volume — gal
1-Row (Heat)

0.08

0.11

0.14

2-Row

0.15

0.22

0.28

3-Row

0.23

0.33

0.42

Fins/ft
2-Row

144

3-Row

144

Fan Quantity

Size — Dia”x Width”

5 x 23

5 x 32

5 x 41

Motor Quantity

Quantity

Size — in.

8-7/8 x 24-1/8

8-7/8 x 33-5/8

8-7/8 x 42-1/8

Fan/Motor Data

Filter Data
1” (2.5 cm) TA

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 14 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Available Models

Model A:
Vertical Concealed

Model B:
Vertical Short

Model C:
Horizontal Concealed

Model D:
Horizontal Cabinet

Model E:
Horizontal Recessed

Model F:
Wall Hung Cabinet
(Force-Flo units only)

Model L:
Low Vertical Concealed

Model K:
Low Vertical Cabinet

Model H:
Vertical Recessed

Model J:
Slope-Top Cabinet

Model M:
Inverted Vertical Cabinet
(Force-Flo units only)

Model N:
Inverted Vertical Recessed
(Force-Flo units only)

Model P:
Compact Concealed

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 15 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Factory-Installed Piping Packages

Auto Circuit Setter (C)

Note: This figure shows piping package components and
basic arrangement. It is not an accurate pictorial of
what factory-installed piping packages look like.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 16 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Vertical Concealed, Model A

Vertical Concealed Unit
Unit Size

200-300

400

600

800

No. of Fans

No. of Motors

2’-8 11/16”

3’-1 11/16”

3’-11 3/16”

4’-7 11/16”

6’-2 11/16”

1’-9 5/16”

2’-2 5/16”

2’-11 13/16”

3’-8 5/16”

5’-3 5/16”

3’-1 5/16”

3’-9 13/16”

5’-4 13/16”

1’-10 13/16” 2’-3 13/16”

1000-1200

1’-5 5/16”

1’-10 5/16”

2’-7 13/16”

3’-4 5/16”

4’-11 5/16”

1’-7 5/16”

2’-0 5/16”

2’-9 13/16”

3’-6 5/16”

5’-1 5/16”

Notes:
1. Coil connections are always on the drain pan side and opposite the control box.
2. Coil connections are 5/8” O.D. sweat. See p. 29 and p. 30 for locations.
3. All duct collar dimensions are to the outside of the collar.
4. See p. 33 for dimensions for outside air openings.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 17 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Vertical Cabinet, Model B

Vertical Cabinet Unit
Unit Size

200-300

400

600

800

No. of Fans

1000-1200
3

No. of Motors

2’-9 5/16”

3’-2 5/16”

3’-11 13/16”

4’-8 5/16”

6’-3 5/16”

1’-9 5/16”

2’-2 5/16”

2’-11 13/16”

3’-8 5/16”

5’-3 5/16”

7 5/8”

7 1/8”

8 7/8”

7 1/8”

7 5/8”

1’-16”

2’-0”

2’-6”

3’-6”

5’-0”

1’-7 5/16”

2’-0 5/16”

2’-9 13/16”

3’-6 5/16”

5’-1 5/16”

3’-5 5/16”

3’-10 5/16”

4’-7 13/16”

5’-4 5/16”

6’-11 5/16”

Notes:
1. Coil connections are always on the drain pan side and opposite the control box
and unit control.
2. Coil connections are 5/8” O.D. sweat. See p. 29 and p. 30 for locations.
3. See p. 33 for dimensions for outside air openings.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 18 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Horizontal Concealed, Model C

Horizontal Concealed Unit Dimensions (in.) and Weights (lb)
Unit Size

200-300

400

600

800

No. of Fans

No. of Motors

2’-8 11/16”

3’-1 11/16”

3’-11 3/16”

4’-7 11/16”

6’-2 11/16”

1’-9 5/16”

2’-2 5/16”

2’-11 13/16”

3’-8 5/16”

5’-3 5/16”

3’-1 5/16”

3’-9 13/16”

5’-4 13/16”
5’-1 3/8”

1’-10 13/16” 2’-3 13/16”

1000-1200

1’-7 3/8”

2’-0 3/8”

2’-9 7/8”

3’-6 3/8”

1’-6 1/8”

1’-11 1/8”

2’-8 5/8”

3’-5 1/8”

5’-0 1/8”

1’-7 5/16”

2’-0 5/16”

2’-9 13/16”

3’-6 5/16”

5’-1 5/16”

Notes:
1. Coil connections are always on the drain pan side and opposite the control
box.
2. Coil connections are 5/8” O.D. sweat. See p. 29 and p. 30 for locations.
3. All duct collar dimensions are to the outside of the collar.
4. See p. 32 for dimensions for outside air openings.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 19 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Horizontal Cabinet, Model D

Horizontal Cabinet Unit
Unit Size

200-300

400

600

800

1000-1200

No. of Fans

No. of Motors

2’-9 5/16”

3’-2 5/16”

3’-11 3/16”

4’-8 5/16”

6’-3 5/16”

1’-9 5/16”

2’-2 5/16”

2’-11 13/16”

3’-8 5/16”

5’-3 5/16”

7 5/8”

7 1/8”

8 7/8”

7 1/8”

7 5/8”

1’-6”

2’-0”

2’-6”

3’-6”

5’-0”

1’-5 1/4”

1’-10 1/4”

2’-7 3/4”

3’-4 1/4”

3’-5 1/4”

3’-10 5/16”

4’-7 3/16”

5’-4 5/16”

6’-11 5/16”

8-5/8”

8-1/8”

9-7/8”

8-1/8”

8-5/8”

1’-4”

1’-10”

2’-4”

3’-4”

4’-10”

1’-7 3/4”

1’-11 3/4”

2’-7 3/4”

3’-3 3/4”

4’-11 3/4”

Notes:
1. Coil connections are always on the drain pan side and opposite the control
box.
2. Coil connections are 5/8” O.D. sweat. See p. 29 and p. 30 for locations.
3. All duct collar dimensions are to the outside of the collar.
4. See p. 32 for dimensions for outside air openings.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 20 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Horizontal Recessed, Model E

Horizontal Recessed Unit
Unit Size

200-300

400

600

800

No. of Fans

No. of Motors

2
6’-5 13/16”

A
B
C

2’-11 13/16” 3’-4 13/16”
1’-9 5/16”

2’-2 5/16”

1’-10 13/16” 2’-3 13/16”

1000-1200

4’-2 5/16”

4’-10 13/16”

2’-11 13/16”

3’-8 5/16”

5’-3 5/16”

3’-1 5/16”

3’-9 13/16”

5’-4 13/16”

1’-7 3/8”

2’-0 3/8”

2’-9 7/8”

3’-6 3/8”

5’-1 3/8”

1’-6 1/8”

1’-11 1/8”

2’-8 5/8”

3’-5 1/8”

5’-0 1/8”

2’-8 7/16”

3’-1 7/16”

3’-10 15/16”

4’-7 7/16”

6’-2 7/16”

2’-10 5/16”

3’-3 5/16”

4’-0 13/16”

4’-9 5/16”

6’-4 5/16”

1’-7 3/4”

1’-11 3/4”

2’-7 3/4”

3’-3 3/4”

4’-11 3/4”

Notes:
1. Coil connections are always on the drain pan side.
2. Coil connections are 5/8” O.D. sweat. See p. 29 and p. 30 for locations.
3. All duct collar dimensions are to the outside of the collar.
4. See p. 32 for dimensions for outside air openings.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 21 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Vertical Wall Hung Cabinet, Model F
(Force-Flo Units Only)

Vertical Wall Hung Cabinet Unit
Unit Size

200-300

400

600

800

1000-1200

No. of Fans

No. of
Motors

2’-9 5/16”

3’-2 5/16”

3’-11 13/16”

4’-8 5/16”

6’-3 5/16”

1’-9 5/16”

2’-2 5/16”

2’-11 13/16”

3’-8 5/16”

5’-3 5/16”

7 5/8”

7 1/8”

8 7/8”

7 1/8”

7 5/8”

1’-6”

2’-0”

2’-6”

3’-6”

5’-0”

1’-7 5/16”

2’-0 5/16”

2’-9 13/16”

3’-6 5/16”

5’-1 5/16”

1’-7 3/4”

1’-11 3/4”

2’-7 3/4”

3’-3 3/4”

4’-11 3/4”

Notes:
1. Coil connections are always opposite the control box side.
2. Coil connections are 5/8” O.D. sweat. See p. 29 and p. 30 for locations.
3. All duct collar dimensions are to the outside of the collar.
4. See p. 33 for dimensions for outside air openings.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 22 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Vertical Recessed, Model H
Vertical Recessed Unit
Unit Size

200-300

400

600

800

No. of Fans

No. of Motors

2’-8 11/16”

3’-1 11/16”

3’-11 3/16”

4’-7 11/16”

6’-2 11/16”

1’-9 5/16”

2’-2 5/16”

2’-11 13/16”

3’-8 5/16”

5’-3 5/16”

3’-1 5/16”

3’-9 13/16”

5’-4 13/16”

1’-10 13/16” 2’-3 13/16”

1000-1200

1’-5 5/16”

1’-10 5/16”

2’-7 13/16”

3’-4 5/16”

4’-11 5/16”

3’-11”

4’-3”

5’-3”

5’-5 1/2”

7’-5 1/2”

2’-6”

2’-9 1/2”

2 3/8”

4 1/8”

3’-6”

4’-0”

4’-9”

5’-3”

7’-3”

2’-2 1/2”

2’-3 1/2”

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 23 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Vertical Slope Top, Model J

Vertical Slope Top Unit
Unit Size

200-300

400

600

800

No. of Fans

1000-1200
3

No. of Motors

2’-9 5/16”

3’-2 5/16”

3’-11 13/16”

4’-8 5/16”

6’-3 5/16”

1’-9 5/16”

2’-2 5/16”

2’-11 13/16”

3’-8 5/16”

5’-3 5/16”

7 5/8”

7 1/8”

8 7/8”

7 1/8”

7 5/8”

1’-6”

2’-0”

2’-6”

3’-6”

5’-0”

1’-7 5/16”

2’-0 5/16”

2’-9 13/16”

3’-6 5/16”

5’-1 5/16”

3’-5 5/16”

3’-10 5/16”

4’-7 13/16”

5’-4 5/16”

6’-11 5/16”

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 24 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Low Vertical Concealed, Model K
Low Vertical Concealed Unit Dimensions
(in.) and Weights (lb)
Unit Size
A

2-3/8"

06
59-7/16”

26-1/4”

35-3/4”

44-1/4”

27-15/16”

36-13/16”

45-15/16”

22-5/16”

31-13/16”

40-5/16”

24-1/4”

339-3/4”

42-1/4”

Operating
Weight

109

139

147

Shipping
Weight

123

131

12-1/2"

2-9/16"
1-1/16"

04
50-15/16”

6-1/4"
12-1/4"

1-1/16"

3-3/8"

03
41-7/16”

Notes:
1. Coil connections are always on the drain pan side
and opposite the control box.
2. Coil connections are 5/8” O.D. sweat.
3. All duct collar dimensions are to the outside of the
collar.
4. See p. 33 for dimensions for outside air openings.
5. Serviceability for some components within this
unit may require panel or drain pan removal.

9-5/16"

1-13/16"

3-9/16"

12-9/16"
7-1/4"
13-1/4"

14-1/2"

2-11/16"

3-1/4"
10-11/16"

6-7/16"

14-1/4"

13-1/2"

1-15/16"
1-1/8"
1-5/16"
14"

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 25 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Low Vertical Cabinet, Model L

10-15/16"

3-1/16"

10-15/16"

2-3/8"
4-7/16"

12-1/4"
12-1/2"

8-1/2"

3-7/8"
7-1/2"
9-13/16"
1-13/16"

1-13/16"

13-3/16"

2-11/16"
13-1/2"
3-1/4"
6-7/16"
11-5/16"

11-5/16"

1-15/16"
1-5/16"
14-1/2"

1-1/8"

Low Vertical Cabinet Unit Dimensions (in.)
and Weights (lb)
Unit Size
A

46-15/16”

56-7/16”

64-15/16”

26-1/4”

35-3/4”

44-1/4”

11-7/16”

13-5/16”

11-7/16”

24”

30”

42”

24-1/4”

33-3/4”

42-1/4”

Operating
Weight

125

155

164

Shipping
Weight

112

139

148

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 26 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Inverted Vertical Cabinet, Model M
(Force-Flo Units Only)

Inverted Vertical Cabinet Unit Dimensions (in.) and Weights (lb)
Unit Size

02–03

10–12

33-5/16”

38-5/16”

47-13/16”

56-5/16”

75-5/16”

21-5/16”

26-5/16”

35-13/16”

44-5/16”

63-5/16”

7-5/8”

7-1/8”

8-7/8”

7-1/8”

7-5/8”

18”

24”

30”

42”

60”

19-5/16”

24-5/16”

33-13/16”

42-5/16”

61-5/16”

19-3/4”

23-3/4”

31-3/4”

39-3/4”

59-3/4”

Operating
Weight

125

155

164

218

Shipping
Weight

112

139

148

200

Notes:
1. Coil connections are always opposite the control box side.
2. Coil connections are 5/8” O.D. sweat. See p. 31 for locations.
3. All duct collar dimensions are to the outside of the collar.
4. See p. 33 for dimensions for outside air openings.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 27 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Inverted Vertical Recessed, Model N
(Force-Flo Units Only)
Inverted Vertical Recessed Unit Dimensions (in.) and Weights
(lb)
Unit Size

02–03

27-7/8”

32-7/8”

42-3/8”

50-7/8”

10–12
69-7/8”

21-5/16”

26-5/16”

35-13/16”

44-5/16”

63-5/16”
64-13/16”

22-13/16”

27-13/16”

37-5/16”

45-13/16”

2-3/8”

4-1/8”

47”

51”

63”

65-1/2”

89-1/2”

30”

33-1/2”

26-1/2”

27-1/2”

42”

48”

57”

63”

87”

Operating
Weight

128

139

253

Shipping
Weight

118

129

243

Notes:
1. Coil connections are always opposite the control box side.
2. Coil connections are 5/8” O.D. sweat. See p. 30 for locations.
3. All duct collar dimensions are to the outside of the collar.
4. See p. 33 for dimensions for outside air openings.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 28 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Compact Concealed, Model P
TOP VIEW

2-5/16”

E
BACK INLET DUCT COLLAR
9/16”

9/16”

2-5/16”
3-1/4”
(4) 5/8” DIA KEYSLOT
HANGER HOLES
SECONDARY DRAIN
CONNECTION FOR
3/8” ID TUBE
MAIN DRAIN (OPTIONAL)
CONNECTION FOR
7/8” OD COPPER
TUBE AND CLAMP

7/8” KO
CONTROL
WIRING

1" DUCT COLLAR

CONTROL
BOX

FILTERS

15-1/2”

SIDE VIEW
3-1/4”

INLET OPTIONS

2”

5/8”

6-1/8”

14-1/8”
1-3/4”

1-3/4”

3/4”

FRONT VIEW
RH PIPING

FILTER DOOR USED
WITH BACK DUCT
COLLAR ONLY

3/4”

1-11/16”

27-3/16”
BACK DUCT COLLAR

6-3/8”

D
1-11/16”

5/8”

(4) 5/8” DIA KEYSLOT
HANGER HOLES

1” DUCT COLLAR
2-7/16”

AIR
FLOW

8-7/8”

CONTROL
BOX

FRONT OUTLET
DUCT COLLAR

FILTERS

6-15/16”

6-5/8”

BACK INLET
DUCT COLLAR

5-5/16”

10-1/16”

2-5/16”
4-9/16”

1-3/32” KO
7/8” KO

4-7/8” X F

A
POWER
WIRING
BOTTOM
ONLY

BOTTOM INLET
OPEN

26-3/4”

Compact Concealed Unit

FRONT VIEW
LH PIPING
1-1/8”
COIL CONNECTIONS

AUXILIARY
DRAIN PAN

CONTROL
BOX

Unit Size

200-300

400

600

800

1000-1200

32-11/16”

37-11/16”

47-3/16”

55-11/16”

74-11/16”

21-5/16”

26-5/16”

35-13/16”

44-5/16”

63-5/16”

22-13/16”

27-13/16”

37-5/16”

45-13/16”

64-13/16”

19-3/8”

24-3/8”

33-7/8”

42-3/8”

61-3/8”

18-1/8”

23-1/8”

32-5/8”

41-1/8”

60-1/8”

19-5/16”

24-5/16”

33-13/16”

42-5/16”

61-5/16”

Notes:
1. Coil connections are always on the drain pan side and opposite the control box
and unit control.
2. Coil connections are 5/8” O.D. sweat. See p. 30 and p. 31 for locations.
3. All duct collar dimensions are to the outside of the collar.
4. See p. 32 for dimensions for outside air openings.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 29 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Fan-Coil Coil Connections
Vertical Units

Horizontal Units

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 30 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Force-Flo Coil Connections
Vertical Units

Horizontal Units

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 31 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Force-Flo Coil Connections
Inverted Units

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 32 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Fresh Air Opening Locations
Horizontal Units—Models C, D, E, and P (Back
Duct Collar Only for Model P)

Fresh air opening dimensions, horizontal units

Unit Size

02–03

1’ 6”

1’ 11”

2’ 8-1/2”

3’ 5”

1’ 9-5/16”

2’ 2-5/16” 2’ 11-13/16” 3’ 8-5/16”

10–12
5’ 0”
5’ 3-5/16”

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 33 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Fresh Air Opening Locations
Vertical Units—Models A, B, F, H, J, K, L, M,
and N

Fresh air opening dimensions, vertical units
Unit Size

02–03

1’ 6”

1’ 11”

2’ 8-1/2”

3’ 5”

1’ 9-5/16”

UNT-SVX07D-EN

2’ 2-5/16” 2’ 11-13/16” 3’ 8-5/16”

10–12
5’ 0”
5’ 3-5/16”

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 34 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Wall Box
Wall box dimensions

Continuous
Mortar Ribs
Top and
Bottom
1/8”

1/8”
1/2”

Unit Size, Ref. only

Dimensions A x B

02–03

24-3/8 x 4- 3/4

Internal Supports
1

24-3/8 x 7-1/2

33-1/8 x 7-1/2

37-1/2 x 7-1/2

10–12

58-1/4 x 7-1/2

3/4”
1/2”
1-3/8”

1/8”
4”
Clearance for
Drainage

Woven Aluminum
Insect Screen

Continuous Drip Lip
Top and Bottom

Additional Internal
Supports Equally Spaced
Not to Exceed 12” O.C.

5/8”

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 35 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Dimensions and Weights

Projection Panel
Unit to Wall—Top View

Front View ISO
Rear View ISO

Projection panel dimensions
Unit Size

02–03

3’ 11”

4’ 3”

5’ 3”

5’ 5-1/2”

7’ 5-1/2”

10–12

2’ 6”

2’ 9-1/2”

Projection panel, all unit sizes
C

2”

2-1/2”

3”

3-1/2”

4”

4-1/2”

5”

5-1/2”

6”

2”

1-1/8”

1-5/8”

2-1/8”

2-5/8”

3-1/8”

3-5/8”

4-1/8”

4-5/8”

5-1/8”

1-1/8”

8-5/8”

8-1/8”

7-5/8”

7-1/8”

6-5/8”

6-1/8”

5-5/8”

5-1/8”

4-5/8”

8-5/8”

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 36 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—Mechanical
Duct Connections

Piping Considerations

Install all air ducts according to National Fire Protection
Association standards for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (NFPA 90A and
90B).

Hydronic Coil Piping
Before installing field piping to the coil, consider the
following:
•

All coil connections are 5/8-inch O.D. (or 1/2-inch
nominal) female copper connections.

•

The supply and return piping should not interfere with
the auxiliary drain pan or condensate line. See
“Connecting the Condensate Drain” section for more
detailed information.

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors!

•

The installer must provide adequate piping system
filtration and water treatment.

Disconnect all electric power, including remote
disconnects and discharge all motor start/run
capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/
tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be
inadvertently energized. For variable frequency drives
or other energy storing components provided by Trane
or others, refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s
literature for allowable waiting periods for discharge of
capacitors. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all
capacitors have discharged. Failure to disconnect
power and discharge capacitors before servicing could
result in death or serious injury.

•

Exterior condensate may be an issue (fan-coils only) if
field piping does not have a control valve. Refer to the
supply and return header locations in the “Dimensions
and Weights” section.

Install all air ducts according to the National Fire Protection
Association standards for the “Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilation Systems other than
Residence Type (NFPA 90A) and Residence Type Warm Air
Heating and Air Conditioning Systems (NFPA 90B).

For additional information regarding the safe discharge of
capacitors, see PROD-SVB06A-EN
The unit’s airflow configuration varies dependent on the
model and options ordered. A one-inch duct collar is
provided on units with a ducted return and/or discharge to
attach ductwork to the unit.
Trane recommends using galvanized sheet metal
ductwork with fan-coil and cabinet heater units. Slide the
sheetmetal duct over the duct collar flange of the unit, seal
the joint and fasten with sheetmetal screws.
Note: Do not run screws through the removable front
panel on concealed units.

Ductwork Recommendations
Follow the general recommendations listed below when
installing ductwork for the unit.
1. Discharge ductwork should run in a straight line,
unchanged in size or direction, for a minimum
equivalent distance of three fan diameters from the
unit (approximately 20 inches).
2. When making duct turns and transitions avoid sharp
turns and use proportional splits, turning vanes, and
air scoops when necessary.
3. When possible, construct, and orient supply ductwork
turns in the same direction as the fan rotation.

Note: When using a field supplied piping package in a
fan-coil unit, allow sufficient room to install the
auxiliary drain pan. In addition, piping package
must not extend over edges of auxiliary drain pan.

Connecting Field Piping to Coil
1. Remove the auxiliary drain pan, if it is in place, to
prevent exposure to dripping solder or excessive
temperatures.
2. Slide a 1/2-inch sweat connection coupling (installer
provided) onto the coil headers.
Note: For vertical fan-coil units, push the main
condensate drain hose and overflow
condensate drain hose through the inside of the
chassis end panel to prevent them from getting
burned when making sweat connections. Be
sure to pull the hoses back through and route to
the auxiliary drain pan when the end panel has
cooled.
3. Solder the joint using bridgit lead-free solder (ASTM
B32-89) to provide a watertight connection. Avoid
overheating factory soldered joints when soldering
field connections to the coil to prevent leakage from
occurring.
4. Insulate all piping to coil connections as necessary
after connections are complete.
Note: Maintain a minimum distance of one foot
between the reduction fitting for the 1/2-inch
diameter line and the fan-coil unit piping
connections.
5. Install the optional auxiliary drain pan, which ships in
the accessory packet.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 37 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—Mechanical
Water Piping Connections to Factory-Installed
Piping Package
Before installing water piping supply and return lines to
factory piping package, note the following items.
•

All piping connections are 5/8-inch O.D. (1/2-inch
nominal) female copper connections.

•

The fan-coil supply and return piping should not
interfere with the auxiliary drain pan or condensate
line. See “Condensate Drain,” p. 37 for more
information.

•

The installer must provide adequate piping system
filtration and water treatment.

•

If the unit has a factory deluxe piping package, the
piping includes a strainer with a 20-mesh size screen,
which allows minimal protection from debris.
Therefore, clean the strainer regularly.

Note: Maintain a minimum distance of one foot between
the reduction fitting for the 1/2-inch diameter line
and the fan-coil piping connections.

Install a secondary overflow drain line if necessary by
punching out the overflow drain nipple on the auxiliary
drain pan. Next, place a 3/8-inch inside diameter flexible
plastic tube over the nipple and secure with a field
supplied hose clamp.
Note: The installer is responsible for adequately
insulating field piping. See the “External Insulating
Requirements section for more information.

Condensate Overflow Detection Device
The condensate overflow detection device is an option on
fan-coil units with either a Tracer ZN010, ZN510, ZN520,
UC400, or the customer-supplied control interface. The
float switch, mounting bracket, and coiled leads ship
attached inside the piping end pocket of the unit. Install the
switch by placing the hole or slot in the bracket over the
condensate overflow drain (of the auxiliary drain pan) with
the switch float extending over the pan. Secure the drain
pan by attaching the pan’s bracket with the factory
provided clip. See Figure 3 and Figure 4.
Figure 3.

Condensate float switch installed in
horizontal auxiliary drain pan

Figure 4.

Condensate float switch installed in vertical
auxiliary drain pan

1. The factory piping package ships with brackets to
adequately support the piping during shipment.
Remove these brackets before connecting water piping
to the unit.
2. Close the piping end valves to the fully open position
to prevent damage to the valve seat during brazing.
3. Remove the auxiliary drain pan, if it is in place, to
prevent exposure to dripping solder or excessive
temperatures.
4. Solder water piping connections to supply and return
end connections. Avoid overheating factory soldered
joints to prevent the possibility of leakage.
5. Insulate fan-coil piping to auxiliary drain pan
connections and any piping that is not above the
auxiliary drain pan.

Condensate Drain
1. De-burr the pipe end before making the connection to
the drain pan.
2. Connect a 7/8-inch O.D. copper pipe or tube, with a 0.20
inch wall thickness, to the auxiliary drain pan. This
should be a mechanical connection that allows easy
removal of the auxiliary drain pan when servicing the
piping end pocket.
3. Slide the copper pipe over the drain pan nipple and
tighten the collar on the pipe with a hose clamp
(installer supplied).
Maintain a continuous drain line pitch of one inch per ten
feet of drain line run to provide adequate condensate
drainage. Extend the drain line straight from the drain pan
a minimum distance of six inches before making any turns.
The installer must provide proper support for the drain line
to prevent undue stress on the auxiliary drain pan.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 38 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—Mechanical
Automatic Changeover Sensor
Two-pipe changeover units with either the Tracer ZN010,
ZN510, ZN520, and UC400 and CSTI controls have an
automatic changeover sensor that determines heating or
cooling mode based on the supply water temperature. On
units with a factory piping package, the factory straps the
changeover sensor to the piping supply water pipe. See
Figure 5, p. 38 and Figure 6, p. 38.
Figure 5.

Attach the changeover sensor to the entering
water pipe as shown for changeover to work
properly

able to sense the correct system water temperature,
regardless of the control valve position.
Note: The maximum length of the automatic changeover
wire cannot exceed ten feet from the control panel.
If the sensor extends beyond the unit chassis, use
shielded conductors to eliminate radio frequency
interference (RFI).

Venting the Hydronic Coil
The hydronic coil contains a vent, either manual or
automatic, to release air from the unit. This vent is not
sufficient for venting the water piping system in the
building.
The coil air vent is on the piping side, above the coil
connections on the unit. See Figure 7 and Figure 8.
Perform the following steps to vent the coil after installing
the unit.

Figure 6.

Figure 7.

Manual coil air vent with set screw

Figure 8.

Manual coil air vent with Shrader fitting

Close-up view of the changeover sensor

If the unit does not have a factory piping package, the
factory attaches the sensor and coiled lead wires to the
piping side end panel. The installer should attach the
sensor parallel to and in direct contact with the supply
water pipe.
Note: The installer is responsible to ensure the
changeover sensor is installed in a location that can
sense active water temperature. Otherwise, the
unit may fail to sense the correct operating mode
and disable temperature control.
When using field supplied three-way valves, install the
changeover sensor upstream of the valve on the supply
water pipe. When using field supplied two-way control
valves, install the changeover sensor in a location that will
detect active water temperature. The unit must always be
38

1. Pressurize the building piping system with water and
vent any trapped air at system vents.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 39 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—Mechanical
2. For units with manual air vents, back the set screw out
to expel air from the unit and then re-tighten the set
screw.

Figure 10.

Automatic circuit setter valve

Figure 11.

Automatic circuit setter valve

The automatic air vent should require no adjustment for
the coil to vent. However, if the coil does not vent
immediately, unscrew the outer portion of the fitting to
expel air from the port.
If debris has become trapped in the vent, completely
remove the outer portion of the fitting and clean.

External Insulating Requirements
Insulate and vapor seal surfaces colder than surrounding
air dew-point a to prevent unplanned condensation. Trane
recommends field-insulation of the following areas to
prevent potential condensate problems:
1. Supply and return water piping connections
2. Condensate drain lines and connections
3. Fresh air intake duct connections
4. Discharge duct connections
5. Wall boxes

Balancing The Manual Circuit Setter Valve
The manual circuit setter valve is an optional end valve
supplied on the return pipe of the factory piping package.
The valve allows the operator to regulate water flow
through the hydronic coil, balance the water flow through
the unit with other units in the piping system, and serves
as a shutoff or end valve. See Figure 9.
Figure 9.

Manual circuit setter valve
Perform the following procedure to set maximum water
flow through the coil:
1. Establish water flow through the coil. Perform an open
override of the valve if the control valve is closed to the
coil, either manually or by Tracer.
If the piping package has two-position, normally
closed valves: Drive open the valve using a 24 V signal.
If the piping package has two-position, normally open
valves: Manually drive open the valve by removing
power to the valve.
If the piping package has modulating valves: To
manually drive the valve open, depress the button
stem on top of the valve and push the lever located on
the side of the valve to the full open position.
2. For presetting, use the appropriate valve curve shown
in Figure 12, p. 40 to determine which setting is
necessary to achieve the appropriate pressure drop.
The “M” line is the appropriate line.
3. Carefully remove the Schrader pressure port
connection caps on the manual circuit setter, since they
will be at the same temperature as the pipeline.
4. Bleed all air from the hoses and meter before reading
the pressure drop. Refer to the gauge operating
instructions.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 40 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—Mechanical
5. Adjust the circuit setter valve by turning the valve stem
until the appropriate pressure drop is achieved.
6. After achieving the proper setting, slightly loosen the
two socket head cap screws and rotate the memory
stop around until it touches the back side of the
indicator. Then tighten the screws to securely set the
open memory position. The memory stop indicates the
last set open position.

NOTICE:
Coil Damage!
In all steam coil installations, the condensate return
connections must be at the low point of the coil to
ensure condensate flows freely from the coil at all
times. Failure to do so could cause physical coil
damage from water hammer, unequal thermal stresses,
freeze-up and/or corrosion.

If using a three-way valve: close the control valve to the
coil, with the differential pressure meter still
connected. This will divert flow to the bypass side of a
three-way valve.

1. Make piping connections to the steam coil as shown in
Figure 14. Cap the unused connection.

Adjust the balancing fitting to obtain the same pressure
drop across the circuit setter valve as in step two when the
control valve was open to the coil.

2. The coil is already pitched within the unit to provide
proper pitch to drain condensate out of the coil. Verify
that the unit has been properly leveled.

Figure 12. Manual circuit setter valve, differential
pressure vs. flow

3. Install a 1/2-inch, 15-degree swing check vacuum
breaker in the unused condensate return tapping as
close as possible to the coil.

4. Vent the vacuum breaker line to atmosphere or
connect it into the return main at the discharge side of
the steam trap.
5. Pitch all steam supply and return mains down a
minimum of one inch per ten feet in the direction of
flow.
6. Do not drain the steam mains or take-off through the
coils. Drain the mains ahead of the coils through a
steam trap to the return line.
7.

Overhead returns require one psig of pressure at the
steam trap discharge for each two-feet elevation to
ensure continuous condensate removal.

8. Proper steam trap selection and installation is
necessary for satisfactory coil performance and
service life. For installation, use the following steps:
a. Position the steam trap discharge at least 12 inches
below the condensate return connection. This
provides sufficient hydrostatic head pressure to
overcome trap losses and ensure complete
condensate removal.
b. Trane recommends using flat and thermostatic
traps because of gravity drain and continuous
discharge operation.
c. Use float and thermostatic traps with atmospheric
pressure gravity condensate return, with automatic
controls or where the possibility of low pressure
supply steam exists.
Note: Instructions for using this chart appear on the
preceding page. For the manual circuit setter
provided with fan-coil or Force-Flo units, use the
‘M’.

d. Always install strainers as close as possible to the
trap inlet side. Reference Figure 13 for an example
of a properly piped steam coil.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 41 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—Mechanical
Figure 13. Typical piping for steam coils

Code of System Components in Piping Diagram
FT

Float and thermostatic steam trap

Bucket steam trap

Gate valve

Automatic two-position (on-off) control valve

Automatic three-way control valve

Vacuum breaker

Check valve

Strainer

Automatic or manual air vent

Figure 14. Main steam coil connection diagram

vacuum breaker (if desired)

steam supply

plugged

condensate return

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 42 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—General
Installing the Unit
Follow the procedures below to install the unit properly.
Refer to “Dimensions and Weights,” p. 12 for specific unit
dimensions and mounting hole locations.

Vertical Units
NOTICE:
Electrical Wiring!
Do not allow electrical wire to fall between the unit and
installation surface. Failure to comply may result in
electrical shorts or difficulty accessing wires.
Install vertical units in an upright position using the 5/8inch diameter double key slot hanger holes, located on the
back of unit. The hanger holes allow a maximum shank
size of 5/16-inch diameter threaded rods or lag screws
(installer provides).
1. Prepare wall openings for recessed units. Reference
unit submittal for each unit size dimensions. When
installing vertical units, consideration should be given
for units with an outside air intake.
2. If the unit has leveling legs, adjust them correctly to
level unit.
3. Mark the position of the keyslot hanger holes on the
wall according to the dimensions given in
“Dimensions and Weights,” p. 12 for each unit model
and size. Align the hole locations evenly.
4. Insert the threaded rods or lag screws in the wall before
setting the unit in place.
5. Remove the front panel (cabinet unit only) by lifting it
upward.
6. Position the hanger holes, located on the back of the
unit, over the rod or lag screw heads, pushing the unit
downward to properly position.
7.

Complete piping and wiring connections, in addition to
any necessary ductwork to the unit as instructed in the
following sections. Ensure that the auxiliary drain pan
is in position on fan-coil units.

8. Install the front panel before starting the unit.
On cabinet units, replace the front panel by aligning the
bottom tabs on the unit with the respective slots on the
panel bottom. Slide the front panel down onto the tabs
while holding the panel close as possible to the cabinet.
While the bottom tabs are engaged, slide the front panel
upward enough to allow the top engaging edge of the front
panel to lap over the engaging edge of the unit. This
should allow the panel to drop down and lock into
position.
On recessed units, install the front panel by aligning and
locking together the interlocking support channel of the
panel and unit. While holding the panel against the unit,
42

tighten the screws at the top of the panel until it fits tight
against the unit’s front. Do not over tighten the screws.

NOTICE:
Motor Overload!
All unit panels and filters must be in place prior to unit
startup. Failure to have panels and filters in place may
cause motor overload.

Horizontal Units
Install horizontal units suspended from the ceiling using
the four 5/8-inch diameter double key slot hanger holes,
located on the top of the unit. The hanger holes allow a
maximum shank size of
5/16-inch diameter threaded rods or lag screws (installer
provided). Follow the installation procedure below.
Note: Follow the requirements of National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) Standard 90A or 90B,
concerning the use of concealed ceiling spaces as
return air plenums.
1. Prepare the ceiling opening for recessed units.
Reference the unit submittals for dimensions.
2. Position and install the suspension rods or a
suspension device (supplied by installer) according to
the unit model and size in “Dimensions and Weights,”
p. 12.
3. On cabinet units, remove the bottom panel by using a
5/32-inch Allen wrench to unscrew fasteners. Swing
the panel down and lift outward.
4. Level the unit by referencing the chassis end panels.
Adjust the suspension device.
5. Complete piping and wiring connections, in addition to
any necessary ductwork as instructed in the following
sections. Ensure that the auxiliary drain pan is in
position on fan-coil units.
6. Install the bottom panel before starting the unit.
7.

Ensure condensate drain line is pitched one inch per
ten feet of pipe away from the fan-coil unit.

Cabinet Units
Install the bottom panel by placing the hinged end on the
unit’s hinged end (always at the return end of the unit).
Refer to “Dimensions and Weights,” p. 12 for keyslot
hanger hole locations. Swing the panel upward into
position. Secure the panel with the fasteners provided. Do
not overtighten the fasteners.

Recessed Units
Refer to “Dimensions and Weights,” p. 12 for mounting
locations and unit weights. Follow the procedure below
and see Figure 15, p. 43.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 43 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—General
1. Insert the mounting bolts through the panel brackets of
the trim ring and secure to the hanger holes on the unit.
Tighten the mounting bolts to pull the trim ring snug
against the finished ceiling.

Figure 15. Installing the trim ring assembly on
horizontal recessed units

2. Install the bottom panel by placing the hinged end on
the trim ring hinged end (always at the unit’s return
end).
3. Adjust the expansion collar’s inner duct (only on fancoil units with a bottom return) to ensure a tight fit
against the insulation located on the perimeter of the
bottom panel’s return louver.
4. Close the s-hook on each end of safety chain assembly.
Insert s-hooks through holes in unit and door. Close shook on door.
5. Insert retaining screws through bottom panel door and
place retaining rings on screws.
6. Swing the bottom panel upward into position. Hook
the safety chain to the bottom panel and the unit.
Tighten the panel to the unit with the fasteners
provided.

NOTICE:
Unit Leveling!
All unit panels and filters must be in place prior to unit
start-up. Failure to have panels and filters in place may
cause motor overload.

Notes:

UNT-SVX07D-EN

•

The trim ring assembly cannot accommodate unlevel
ceilings.

•

On sizes 8, 10, and 12 center installation position and
use 2- or 3.5-inch bolts, whichever is best suited for
installation. Also, install two safety chains assemblies
on these sizes.

•

Expansion collar is furnished with fan-coil with bottom
return only. The collar is not necessary for Force-Flo
units.

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 44 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—General

Installation Checklist

 7.

The following checklist is only an abbreviated guide to the
detailed installation procedures given in this manual. Use
this list to ensure all necessary procedures are complete.
For more detailed information, refer to the appropriate
sections in this manual.

 8. Install the auxiliary drain pan, if ordered, properly
under piping package on fan-coil units.

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote
disconnects and discharge all motor start/run
capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/
tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be
inadvertently energized. For variable frequency drives
or other energy storing components provided by Trane
or others, refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s
literature for allowable waiting periods for discharge of
capacitors. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all
capacitors have discharged. Failure to disconnect
power and discharge capacitors before servicing could
result in death or serious injury.
For additional information regarding the safe discharge of
capacitors, see PROD-SVB06A-EN
 1. Inspect the unit for shipping damage.
 2. Level installation location to support the unit
weight adequately. Make all necessary wall or
ceiling openings to allow adequate air flow and
service clearances.
 3. Ensure the unit chassis is installed level.

NOTICE:
Unit Leveling!
The unit must be installed level (zero tolerance) in both
horizontal axis for proper operation. Do not use the coil
or drain pan as the reference point because the coil may
be pitched and the drain pan has an inherent positive
slope to provide proper drainage.

Check field sweat connections for leaks and tighten
the valve stem packing, and piping package unions
if necessary.

 9. Complete condensate drain line connections on
fan-coil units.
 10. Pitch condensate drain line away from fan-coil oneinch drop per ten feet of pipe.
 11. Install automatic changeover sensor option on the
supply water line, if applicable.
 12. Install condensate overflow switch option correctly
on the auxiliary drain pan, if applicable.
 13. Ensure the low temperature detection device
option is correctly installed.
 14. Complete all necessary duct connections.
 15. Complete all interconnection wiring for the wallmounted fan mode switch or zone sensor per the
wiring schematic and guidelines established in
“Wall-Mounted Control Interconnection Wiring,”
p. 49.
 16. Install the wall-mounted fan mode switch, or zone
sensor module options properly.
For wireless zone sensors, be sure to set the
address (see “Address Setting,” p. 77).
 17. Make field mounted controller / fan speed switch
connections to CSTI / FSS as indicated on unit
schematic.
 18. Connect electrical supply power according to the
NEC and unit wiring diagrams.
 19. Remove any miscellaneous debris, such as
sheetrock dust, that may have infiltrated the unit
during construction.
 20. Replace the air filter as required.

 4. Verify that wall and ceiling openings are properly
cut per the unit submittals.
 5. Verify that installation of horizontal concealed units
meets the national Fire Protection Association
(N.F.P.A.) Standard 90A or 90B concerning the use of
concealed ceiling spaces as return air plenums.
Verify correct ceiling opening dimensions on unit
submittals.
Secure the unit and any accessory items properly to
the wall or ceiling support rods.
 6. Complete all piping connections correctly.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 45 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—Controls
Control sensor options include both unit-mounted
(factory-installed) and wall-mounted sensors. Installation
instructions for the wall-mounted sensors are provided in
this chapter.

General Information

Tracer ZN510, ZN520, and UC400 Options
Wall-mounted zone sensor:
Digit 30 = F, G, or J and Digit 31 = 1
X13511530-01 (wall)
X13651467-02 (comm)

Control Options (Including FactoryInstalled)
Tracer ZN010 Options
Unit-mounted zone sensor:
Digit 30 = E and Digit 31 = V
X13790843-01

Wall-mounted zone sensor:
Digit 30 = F, G, or J and Digit 31 = 2
X13790842-01 (wall)
X13651467-02 (comm)

Wall-mounted zone sensor:
Digit 30 = E and Digit 31 = W
X13790841-01

Split-mounted zone sensor, unit-mounted fan mode and
wall-mounted setpoint dial:
Digit 30 = F, G, or J and Digit 31 = Y
X13511527-01 (wall)
X13790849-01 (unit)
X13651467-02 (comm)

Split-mounted zone sensor, unit-mounted fan mode
and wall-mounted setpoint dial:
Digit 30 = E and Digit 31 = X
X13511529-01 (wall)
X13790849-01 (unit)

Unit-mounted zone sensor:
Digit 30 = F, G, or J and Digit 31 = Z
X13790844-01

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 46 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—Controls
Wall-mounted wired display sensor
with setpoint adjustment:
Digit 30 = F, G, or J and Digit 31 = 4

Figure 16. Wall-mounted wired and wireless zone
sensor dimensions

X13790886-04 (wall)

4
6

Wall-mounted wireless temperature sensor (WZS)
(setpoint adjustment, no fan speed adjustment) and
unit-mounted receiver:
Digit 30 = F, G, or J and Digit 31 = 6
X13790821-01 (wall)
X13790860-02 (unit)

8
0
-

Wall-mounted wireless display sensor (WDS) and
unit-mounted receiver:
Digit 30 = F, G, or J and Digit 31 = 7

=
X13790822-04 (wall)
X13790860-02 (unit)

0.31 in

3.39 in

TYP R.07 in (R1.9)

4.68 in

TYP 0.24 in)

2.48 in

2.9 in

10. 0.63 in

1.08 in

11. 1.45 in

0.12 in

12. 2.62 in

Sensor

Installing Wall-Mounted Wired
Sensors
Reference the wall-mounted zone sensor dimensions in
Figure 16, p. 46. Position the sensor on an inside wall three
to five feet above the floor and at least 18 inches from the
nearest outside wall. Installing the sensor at a lower height
may give the advantage of monitoring the temperature
closer to the zone, but it also exposes the sensor to airflow
obstructions. Ensure that air flows freely over the sensor.

When selecting a sensor location, avoid the following:
•

Areas of direct sunlight

•

Areas in the direct airstream of air diffusers

•

Exterior walls and other walls that have a temperature
differential between the two sides

•

Areas that are close to heat sources such as sunlight,
appliances, concealed pipes, chimneys, or other heatgenerating equipment

•

Drafty areas

•

Dead spots behind doors, projection screens, or
corners

•

Walls that are subject to high vibration

•

Areas with high humidity

•

High traffic areas (to reduce accidental damage or
tampering)
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 47 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—Controls
•

Metal barriers between the receiver and the sensor (for
example, plastered walls with metal lathe or metal roof
decks)

•

Thick, solid concrete walls between the receiver and
the sensor

•

Placing the sensor inside metal enclosures

Height Requirements
It is recommended that you mount the back plate a
maximum distance of 54 inches above the floor. If a
parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair is required,
reduce the maximum height to 48 inches.
Note: Consult section 4.27.3 of the 2002 ADA (Americans
with Disability Act) guideline, and local building
codes, for further details regarding wheelchair
requirements.

Mounting Surfaces
Using the hardware provided, mount the back plate of the
sensor to a flat surface such as sheetrock or plaster, or an
electrical junction box. The sensor must be mounted
plumb for accurate temperature control and to ensure
proper air movement through the sensor.

more than distance. For best radio transmission range and
reliability, mount the receiver and sensor in line of sight.
Where this is not possible, try to minimize the number of
barriers between the pair of devices. In general, sheetrock
walls and ceiling tiles offer little restriction to the
transmission range for the sensor is as follows:
•

Open range: 2,500 ft (packet error rate = 2%)

•

Usable range: 200 ft

•

Typical range: 75 ft

Fan Mode Switch Installation
The fan mode switch ships loose inside the unit accessory
bag. Follow the steps below to install the fan mode switch.
Items needed:
2 x 4 electrical junction box
1. Remove the brown wire if not using a field-supplied
damper.
2. Remove the terminals, cut and strip wires as required
for installation.
3. Level and position a 2 x 4 electrical junction box.

•

If mounting onto sheetrock or plaster, use the plastic
threaded anchors (pre-drilling holes is not usually
necessary) and the two M3.5 x 20 mm mounting
screws.

4. Follow the instructions given in “Wall-Mounted
Control Interconnection Wiring,” p. 49 and route the
wires as shown in the wiring diagram. Refer to the
typical wiring diagram or to the unit specific diagram
on the unit.

•

For mounting onto an electrical junction box, use the
two 6-32 x 3/4 in. screws.

5. Position the fan mode switch over the junction box
with the two screws supplied.

Before beginning installation, consider the location
considerations below. Also, refer to the unit wiring
schematic for specific wiring details and point
connections.

Zone Sensor Installation

Location Considerations

1. Note the position of the setpoint adjustment knob and
gently pry the adjustment knob from the cover using
the blade of a small screwdriver.

Avoid mounting the sensor in an area subject to the
following conditions:
•

Dead spots, such as behind doors or in corners that do
not allow free air circulation.

•

Air drafts from stairwells, outside doors, or
unsectioned hollow walls.

•

Radiant heat from the sun, fireplaces, appliances, etc.

•

Airflow from adjacent zones or other units.

•

Unheated or uncooled spaces behind the controller,
such as outside walls or unoccupied spaces.

•

Concealed pipes, air ducts, or chimneys in partition
spaces behind the controller.

Location Considerations for Wireless zone
sensors
Placement of the sensor is critical to proper operation (the
receiver is factory mounted on fan-coil units). For most
installations, barriers limit proper radio signal strength
UNT-SVX07D-EN

Follow the procedure below to install the wired zone
sensor module.

2. Insert the screwdriver blade behind the cover at the top
of the module and carefully pry the cover away from
the base.
3. To mount the sensor back plate:
a. Hold the back plate against the mounting surface
and mark the screw locations.
b. Secure the back plate against the mounting surface
using included hardware.
4. To install the zone sensor module to a standard
junction box:
a. Level and install a 2 x 4-in. junction box (installer
supplied) vertically on the wall.
b. Pull the control wires through the cutout. Attach the
module to the wall using the screws provided.
5. Strip the insulation on the interconnection wires back
0.25-inch and connect to TB1 (for wired sensors).
6. Screw down the terminal blocks (for wired sensors).
47

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 48 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—Controls
7.

To replace the cover:
a. Hook the cover over the top of the back plate. Apply
light pressure to the bottom of the cover until it
snaps in place.
b. Install the security screw into the bottom of the
cover (if desired).

If installing a Tracer ZN510 or Tracer ZN520 zone sensor,
see “Tracer ZN510, ZN520, and UC400 Options,” p. 45 for
more information.
Figure 17.

Figure 18.

Security
screw

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 49 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—Electrical
Unit Wiring Diagrams
Specific unit wiring diagrams, based on unit options
ordered, are provided inside each unit and can be easily
removed for reference. Use these diagrams for
connections or trouble analysis. Wiring diagrams are
attached on the inside of the front panel of vertical cabinet
and recessed models and on the fan and motor panel of
vertical concealed and all horizontal models.

Supply Power Wiring
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote
disconnects and discharge all motor start/run
capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/
tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be
inadvertently energized. For variable frequency drives
or other energy storing components provided by Trane
or others, refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s
literature for allowable waiting periods for discharge of
capacitors. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all
capacitors have discharged. Failure to disconnect
power and discharge capacitors before servicing could
result in death or serious injury.
For additional information regarding the safe discharge of
capacitors, see PROD-SVB06A-EN
Refer to the unit nameplate to obtain the minimum circuit
ampacity (MCA) and maximum fuse size (MFS) or
maximum circuit breaker (MCB) to properly size field
supply wiring and fuses or circuit breakers.
Refer to the unit operating voltage listed on the unit wiring
schematic, submittal, or nameplate. Reference the wiring
schematic for specific wiring connections.

WARNING
Hazardous Electrical Shorts!
Insulate all power wire from sheet metal ground.
Failure to do so may cause electrical shorts that could
result in death or serious injury.
If the unit does not have a disconnect switch, the power
leads and capped ground wire are inside the control panel.
If the unit has a disconnect switch, the power leads are
wired to the junction box switch on the control panel. Pull
the capped ground wire into the junction box.

Electrical Grounding Restrictions
All sensor and input circuits are normally at or near ground
(common) potential. When wiring sensors and other input
devices to the Tracer controller, avoid creating ground
loops with grounded conductors external to the unit
control circuit. Ground loops can affect the measurement
accuracy of the controller.

NOTICE:
Equipment Damage!
Unit transformer IT1 provides power to fan-coil unit
only. Field connections directly to the transformer IT1
may create immediate or premature unit component
failure.
All input/output circuits (except isolated relay contacts and
optically isolated inputs) assume a grounded source,
either a ground wire at the supply transformer to control
panel chassis, or an installer supplied ground.

Wall-Mounted Control Interconnection
Wiring

NOTICE:
Use Copper Conductors Only!

The installer must provide interconnection wiring to
connect wall-mounted devices such as a fan mode switch
or zone sensor module.

Unit terminals are not designed to accept other types
of conductors. Failure to use copper conductors may
result in equipment damage.

Refer to the unit wiring schematic for specific wiring
details and point-to-point wiring connections. Dashed
lines indicate field wiring on the unit wiring schematics. All
interconnection wiring must conform to NEC Class 2
wiring requirements and any state and local requirements.

Note: All field wiring should conform to NEC and all
applicable state and local code requirements. The
control panel box is always on the end opposite the
piping connections. Access the control box by
removing the two screws that secure the front
cover. This will allow the panel to be removed, to
provide access to the electrical components.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

Refer to Table 3 for the wire size range and maximum
wiring distance for each device.
Table 3.

Maximum wiring distances for low voltage
controls (ft)

Device

Wire Size

Range

Fan Speed Switch

14–22 AWG

500

Zone Sensor

16–22 AWG

200

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 50 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—Electrical
Recommendation: Do not bundle or run interconnection
wiring in parallel with or in the same conduit with any
high-voltage wires (110 V or greater). Exposure of
interconnection wiring to high voltage wiring, inductive
loads, or RF transmitters may cause radio frequency
interference (RFI). In addition, improper separation may
cause electrical noise problems. Therefore, use shielded
wire (Belden 83559/83562 or equivalent) in applications
that require a high degree of noise immunity. Connect the
shield to the chassis ground and tape at the other end.
Note: Do not connect any sensor or input circuit to an
external ground connection.
Table 4.

FLA

208–230 Volt

FLA

3.1

0.22

1.8

0.22

1.6

0.24

3.1

0.22

1.8

0.22

1.6

0.24

3.1

0.22

1.8

0.22

1.6

0.24

3.1

0.22

1.8

0.22

1.6

0.24

3.1

0.22

1.8

0.22

1.6

0.24
1.6 0.24 0.24

3.1 3.1 0.22 0.22 1.8 1.8 0.22 0.22 1.6

1.6 0.24 0.24

Table 5.

Free discharge electrically commutated motors
(ECMs) programmed to reduced FLA mode
115 Volt

FLA

208–230 Volt

FLA

1090

770

560

3.1

0.22

1090

750

560

3.1

0.22

1115

760

560

Note: Actual rpm will vary with application and configuration.

277 Volt
FLA

Lowboy vertical free discharge electrically
commutated motors (ECMs) programmed
with reduced FLA mode
115 Volt
FLA
HP

Unit Size

0.5
0.8
1

0.22
0.22
0.22

RPM
M

1090
1090
1115

770
750
760

560
560
560

Note: Actual rpm will vary with application and configuration.

Unit
Size

3.1 3.1 0.22 0.22 1.8 1.8 0.22 0.22 1.6

0.22

Table 9.

RPM
M

3.1

3
4
6

115 Volt
FLA
HP

Unit Size

277 Volt

Unit
Size

Low vertical free discharge electrically
commutated motors (ECMs)

Table 8.

Free discharge and High static electrically
commutated motors (ECMs) programmed to
standard ECM mode
115 Volt

Table 7.

Unit RPM
Free Discharge—Units Free Discharge—Units with
with 2-Row Coils
3- and 4-Row Coils
H

980

840

655

980

840

655

980

780

580

1080

800

600

1050

780

580

1080

800

600

1030

780

580

1080

800

600

1080

800

600

1080

800

600

1050

780

580

1080

800

600

1030

780

580

1080

800

600

Unit
Size

0.6

0.22

0.4

0.22

0.3

0.24

0.6

0.22

0.4

0.22

0.3

0.24

0.8

0.22

0.6

0.22

0.4

0.24

1.1

0.22

0.8

0.22

0.6

0.24

Unit
Size

1.6

0.22

1.1

0.22

0.8

0.24

1480

1110

865

1480

1110

865

1050

780

580

1080

800

600

1080

800

600

1080

800

600

High Static—Units with High Static—Units with 32-Row Coils
and 4-Row Coils

0.7 1.2 0.22 0.22 0.5 0.8 0.22 0.22 0.4 0.6 0.24 0.24

1400

1175

860

1500

1355

1110

0.7 1.3 0.22 0.22 0.5 0.9 0.22 0.22 0.4 0.7 0.24 0.24

1475

1315

1070

1580

1375

1240

1400

1070

855

1475

1285

975

1475

1285

975

1475

1285

975

1475

1315

1070

1580

1375

1240

1400

1070

855

1475

1285

975

1475

1315

1070

1580

1375

1240

1475

1285

975

1475

1285

975

Table 6.

High static electrically commutated motors
(ECMs) programmed to reduced FLA mode
115 Volt

Unit FLA
Size 1
2

208–230 Volt

HP
1

FLA
2

HP
1

277 Volt
FLA

HP
1

1.3

0.22

0.9

0.22

0.7

0.24

1.3

0.22

0.9

0.22

0.7

0.24

1.7

0.22

1.2

0.22

0.9

0.24

2.3

0.22

1.6

0.22

1.2

0.24

3.1

0.22

1.8

0.22

1.5

0.24

1.4

1.5 2.8 0.22 0.22 1.1 1.8 0.22 0.22 0.8 1.4 0.24 0.24

0.22 0.22

Note: Actual rpm will vary with application and configuration.

1.4 0.22 0.22 0.7 1.1 0.24 0.24

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 51 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—Electrical
Table 11.

Table 10. Electric heat kW, low vertical fan-coil
Unit Size

Unit Voltage

3.0

115

1.0

1.5

2.0

4.0

115

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

6.0

115

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

Unit
Size
02

Force-Flo single-stage, max kW electric heat
Voltage

# Wires Heater kW

Heater
amps/ph

208/60/1

2.25

10.9

240/60/1

3.0

12.5

277/60/1

3.0

10.9

208/60/3

2.25

6.3

240/60/3

3.0

7.3

480/60/3

3.0

3.7

208/60/1

4.5

21.7

240/60/1

6.0

25.0

277/60/1

6.0

21.7

208/60/3

4.5

12.6

240/60/3

6.0

14.5

480/60/3

6.0

7.3

208/60/1

5.7

27.5

MFS or HACR type circuit breaker = (2.25 x largest motor
FLA) + second motor FLA + heater amps (if applicable)

240/60/1

7.5

31.3

277/60/1

7.5

27.1

HACR (heating, air-conditioning and refrigeration) type
circuit breakers are required in the branch circuit wiring for
all fan-coils with electric heat.

208/60/3

5.7

15.9

240/60/3

7.5

18.1

480/60/3

7.5

9.1

208/60/1

7.9

38.0

240/60/1

10.5

43.8

277/60/1

10.5

38.0

208/60/3

7.9

21.9

240/60/3

10.5

25.3

480/60/3

10.5

12.7

Note: Low vertical units are only available with electric heat in combination
with the two-row cooling coil.

Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA) and
Maximum Fuse Size (MFS) Calculations for
Fan-Coils with Single Phase Electric Heat

Heater amps = (heater kW x 1000)/heater voltage
Note: Use 120 V heater voltage for 115 V units. Use 240 V
heater voltage for 230 V units.
MCA = 1.25 x (heater amps + all motor FLAs)

Select a standard fuse size or HACR type circuit breaker
equal to the MCA. Use the next larger standard size if the
MCA does not equal a standard size.
Standard fuse sizes are: 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60
amps
Fan-coil electric heat MBh = (heater kW) (3.413)

UNT-SVX07D-EN

Note: All data based on individual units. Electric heat will operate only with
fan at high speed.

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 52 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Installation—Electrical
Table 12. Force-Flo single stage, low kW electric heat
Unit
Size

Voltage

208/60/1

240/60/1

#
Wires

amps
/ph

0.8

3.7

1.5

7.3

1.0

4.2

2.0

8.4

2.0

7.3

amps
/ph

Table 13. Force-Flo two-stage electric heat
Unit
Size
02

Voltage

# Wires

1st Stage
kW

208/60/1

0.8

2.3

10.9

240/60/1

1.0

3.0

12.5

Total
kW

Total
amps/ph

277/60/1

1.0

3.7

277/60/1

1.0

3.0

10.9

208/60/1

2.3

10.9

208/60/3

0.8

2.3

6.3

240/60/1

3.0

12.5

240/60/3

1.0

3.0

7.3

277/60/1

3.0

10.9

480/60/3

1.0

3.0

3.7

208/60/3

2.3

6.3

208/60/1

1.5

4.5

21.7

240/60/3

3.0

7.3

240/60/1

2.0

6.0

25.0

480/60/3

3.0

3.7

277/60/1

2.0

6.0

21.7

208/60/1

2.3

10.9

208/60/3

1.5

4.5

12.6

240/60/1

3.0

12.5

240/60/3

2.0

6.0

14.5

277/60/1

3.0

10.9

480/60/3

2.0

6.0

7.3

208/60/3

2.3

6.3

208/60/1

1.9

5.7

27.5

240/60/3

3.0

7.3

240/60/1

2.5

7.5

31.3

480/60/3

3.0

3.7

277/60/1

2.5

7.5

27.1

208/60/1

2.3

10.9

3.3

15.9

208/60/3

1.9

5.7

15.9

240/60/1

3.0

12.5

4.5

18.8

240/60/3

2.5

7.5

18.1

277/60/1

3.0

10.9

4.5

16.3

480/60/3

2.5

7.5

9.1

208/60/3

2.3

6.3

3.3

9.2

208/60/1

3.4

7.9

38.0

240/60/3

3.0

7.3

4.5

10.9

240/60/1

4.5

10.5

43.8

480/60/3

3.0

3.7

4.5

5.5

277/60/1

4.5

10.5

38.0

208/60/1

2.3

10.9

3.3

15.9

4.5

21.7

208/60/3

3.4

7.9

21.9

240/60/1

3.0

12.5

4.5

18.8

6.0

25.0

240/60/3

4.5

10.5

25.3

277/60/1

3.0

10.9

4.5

16.3

6.0

21.7

208/60/3

2.3

6.3

3.3

9.2

4.5

12.5

480/60/3

4.5

10.5

12.7

208/60/1

4.5

10.1

48.8

240/60/3

3.0

7.3

4.5

10.9

6.0

14.5

240/60/1

6.0

13.5

56.3

480/60/3

3.0

3.7

4.5

5.5

6.0

7.3

277/60/1

6.0

13.5

48.8

208/60/1

2.3

10.9

3.3

15.9

5.7

27.5

208/60/3

4.5

10.1

28.2

240/60/1

3.0

12.5

4.5

18.8

7.5

31.3

240/60/3

6.0

13.5

32.5

277/60/1

3.0

10.9

4.5

16.3

7.5

27.1

480/60/3

6.0

13.5

16.3

208/60/3

2.3

6.3

3.3

9.2

5.7

15.9

208/60/1

6.0

13.5

65.0

240/60/3

3.0

7.3

4.5

10.9

7.5

18.1

240/60/1

8.0

18.0

75.0

480/60/3

3.0

3.7

4.5

5.5

7.5

9.1

277/60/1

8.0

18.0

65.0

208/60/1

2.3

10.9

3.3

15.9

6.6

31.8

208/60/3

6.0

13.5

37.6

240/60/1

3.0

12.5

4.5

18.8

9.0

37.5

240/60/3

8.0

18.0

43.3

277/60/1

3.0

10.9

4.5

16.3

9.0

32.5

480/60/3

8.0

18.0

21.7

208/60/3

2.3

6.3

3.3

9.2

6.6

18.4

208/60/1

6.8

15.0

72.3

240/60/3

3.0

7.3

4.5

10.9

9.0

21.7

240/60/1

9.0

20.0

83.4

480/60/3

3.0

3.7

4.5

5.5

9.0

10.9

277/60/1

9.0

20.0

72.3

208/60/3

6.8

15.0

41.7

240/60/3

9.0

20.0

48.2

480/60/3

9.0

20.0

24.1

Note: All data based on individual units.

Note: When both stages are on, the electric heat will operate only when fan
is in high speed. All data based on individual units.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 53 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
Overview

Trane BLDC Motor

This addendum addresses changes to UniTrane Fan-Coil
and Cabinet Heater units, integrating new Trane Brushless
DC motors and controllers. This exciting new series
delivers outstanding comfort, safety, and performance
with greatly reduced energy consumption compared to
traditional units with permanent split capacitance AC
motors.

Figure 20. Trane BLDC motor

The new series of units will provide a long service life with
proper installation and operation. The new system
provides a high degree of flexibility and configurability,
but the simplicity of customized factory configuration
appropriate to most installations.

Very little intervention is needed by service and
installation personnel in most applications; however,
installers must read through the entire document before
beginning installation of the new equipment.
This literature focuses on unit motors and controls,
including three new circuit modules developed
specifically for this series.
Figure 19. UniTrane fan-coil with Trane BLDC motor

High Efficiency Brushless DC (BLDC) Motor Core

Motor Base Housing Potted Electronics Package

•

The BLDC motor has integrated electronics, overload
protection and short circuit protection. The motor
contains no user-serviceable components inside.

NOTICE:
Equipment Damage!
The motor harness attached to the single plug to which
the motor mates contains the very important motor
voltage jumper and should not be modified or
substituted. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in equipment damage.
•

The motor mates to the unit electrically via a single
plug that contains both the operating voltage and the
control signals that are needed for correct operation.

•

The BLDC motor comes in both single shaft (sizes 200,
300, 400, 1000, and 1200) and double shaft (sizes 600,
800, 1000, and 1200) configurations.

Circuit Modules
Trane BLDC Motor

General Information
There are four primary components that enable the
technology on your product:
1. Trane BLDC Motor
2. ECM Engine Board
3. Adapter Board
4. CSTI Adapter Board
The motors and modules are combined as systems, and
cannot work without each other.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

Note: Sizes 1000 and 1200 have both a single shaft
and a double shaft motor installed.
•

The BLDC motor has two voltage variations, 115/
208-230V and 277V. Units with three-phase and neutral
have motors wired to the L-N (as opposed to L-L). The
115/208-230V is configured for voltage by use of an
external jumper. If the jumper is present the motor will
be configured for use with 115V. The jumper must NOT
be present for use with 208-230V.

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 54 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup

ECM Engine Controller
Figure 21.

– Fan Speeds (H, M, L) (for wall mounted fan speed
switches)

ECM engine controller

– Variable speed (0–10V) inputs

Note: Display and Menu/
Enter, Increase, and
Decrease Buttons

•

The standard adapter board eliminates many separate
wiring harnesses in the panel and allows simple,
mistake-proofed single-plug interfacing of:
– The ECM engine controller
– Transformers
– Motors
– Valves
– Dampers
– Electric heat control
– Fan speed switches
– Main Power (except electric heat).

•

The ECM engine controls and reports the performance
of up to two Trane BLDC motors.

•

The engine also co-ordinates the operation of the fan
in response to electric heat behavior, and electric heat
behavior in response to hydronic heat behavior and
fan behavior.

CSTI Adapter Board

•

The engine incorporates a user interface that allows
adjustment of certain unit parameters and provides
constant feedback on motor operation.

•

The engine integrates service and troubleshooting
tools, including high-precision tachometers, fan
status, and electric heat-enable indicators.

•

The engine integrates a versatile configurable
auxiliary temperature sensor.

•

The engine incorporates various safety and lockout
features, such as maintaining proper fan speeds, if
electric heat is called for.

Electric heat lockout circuits and fan proving circuits
for electric heat are standard, and are pre-configured at
the factory.

Figure 23. CSTI adapter board

Standard Adapter Board
Figure 22. Adapter board
Note: Customer LowVoltage
Interface for
Fan Speeds,
Variable Fan
Speed, and
24 Vac Supply

Customer Low-Voltage Interface for Valves, Electric Heat, Dampers, Fan
Speeds, Variable Fan Speed, and 24 Vac Supply

Valve(s), Electric Heat, and Changeover Configuration Switches (FactorySet)

•

Performs all the functions of the standard adapter
module, but in addition, provides convenient field
connections to factory mounted end devices,
including:
– Valves
– Dampers
– Electric Heat

•

The adapter allows direct customer interfacing
through the use of terminal strips. Standard
interfacing includes:

•

Performs courtesy “inversion” of thermostatic inputs
to match selected valves:

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 55 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
– Standard thermostats put out only “on” signals,
however customer may select a normally open
valve. A selectable switch allows the customer to
invert the thermostat outputs for correct operation.
These switches are set at the factory, but can be
adjusted in the field.
– Sophisticated changeover function when used with
a thermistor, that replaces traditional bi-metallic
disc temperature switches:

WARNING
Safety Alert!
You MUST follow all recommendations below. Failure
to do so could result in death or serious injury.
•

The BLDC motors contain capacitors which store
residual energy. Please keep clear of the fan wheels
for 5 minutes after the power has been removed from
the system, as a power request with the motor
powered off, could result in a very short period of
actuation.

•

All settings take effect immediately, including fan
startup and enabling of electric heat. Caution should
be taken to stay clear of hazardous voltages, moving
parts and electric heat elements while making
adjustments to the ECM engine board. If it is not
practical to stay clear of these areas during
adjustment of the ECM engine board, please contact
Trane Global Parts for configuration kit that allows
easy powering of the engine board outside of the unit
with a 9V battery.

•

The adapter boards contain high voltage.
Configuration adjustments to the ECM engine board
should be made through the SMALLER of the two
low-voltage lids on the front of the control panel,
through the low-voltage insulation/shielding.

•

Changes to switch settings on the CSTI adapter
board take effect immediately. Changes should be
made to the CSTI configuration switches with the
power off.

•

Initial hookups to the CSTI and Standard Adapter
board, including low voltage interconnections, must
be made with the power off.

•

Do not make connections to the motors or the
adapter boards while power is ON. Do not remove
connections to the motor or the adapter boards while
the power is ON.

•

Do not free spin the fan wheels with your hands while
the unit is powered on. The system is constantly
scanning and responding to the operational status of
the motors.

• Board will automatically honor only the
appropriate customer request (Heat/Cool)
depending on sensed water temperature.
• Feature can be enabled or disabled with a
selector switch—however, it is set correctly at
the factory, based on customer choice of coil.
• The bi-metallic disc temperature switch
emulation is programmable, and dead-band
range can be adjusted.
• Electric heat lockout circuits and fan proving
circuits for electric heat are standard, and are
pre-configured at the factory.

Installation and Initial Setup
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote
disconnects and discharge all motor start/run
capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/
tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be
inadvertently energized. For variable frequency drives
or other energy storing components provided by Trane
or others, refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s
literature for allowable waiting periods for discharge of
capacitors. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all
capacitors have discharged. Failure to disconnect
power and discharge capacitors before servicing could
result in death or serious injury.

Installation and Initial Setup
Note: Normally, the Trane BLDC motors are configured
for soft ramps and transitions between speeds.
However, to aid in commissioning of the unit, for
approximately 10–15 minutes, the ramps will be
shortened to quickly observe proper unit behavior
and response to speeds.
For new installations, all boards and motors are preinstalled and pre-configured according to the unit
configuration, indicated by its model number.
Under normal and intended operation, the only required
intervention specific to the new BLDC units is the wiring of:
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 56 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
•

Wall-mounted low-voltage fan speed switch inputs to
the adapter boards’ terminal strips and 24 Vac tap to
field-installed fan speed switch.

WARNING
Safety Alert!

•

Field-supplied controllers/thermostats to the adapter
boards’ terminal strips and 24 Vac power tap to
field-supplied controller/thermostat.

•

Adjustment and calibration of the variable speed
inputs (VSP/0–10V) on the system.

•

Hook ups to the adapter boards should be made only
with the power off to the unit.

•

Adjustment, calibration or disabling of the optional
auto-changeover function on CSTI units.

•

Only connect Class 2 voltages to the terminal blocks
on the adapter boards that share a common with the
unit mounted low-voltage transformer.

•

Secure low voltage connections firmly to terminal
strips, and strain-relieve all low voltage connection to
prevent accidental detachment and possible shortcircuiting of high voltage components. Care should
be taken to avoid contact of low voltage wiring to the
back side of the adapter boards, which contain high
voltage.

Otherwise, proceed with the mechanical, electrical and
controls installations as defined in other sections of
UNT-SVX07B-EN (Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance: UniTrane™ Fan-Coil and Force-Flo™ Air
Conditioners), while obeying the warnings communicated
in this literature.

You MUST follow all recommendations below. Failure
to do so could result in death or serious injury.

Proceed with the power on after installation, as defined in
the other sections of UNT-SVX07B-EN.

Wall Mounted Low Voltage Fan Speed Switch/
Customer-Supplied Controller/Thermostat
Instructions

Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
Consult the unit submittals and unit schematics
before determining hookup requirements to the
fan-coil unit. Terminal block positions, polarities
and assignments are determined for specific unit
configurations only. Signal assignments are
indicated, for reference only.
Both adapter boards come equipped with integrated
terminal blocks to hook up to the field supplied/mounted
Fan Speed Switches and external controls. Connections
should be made to the screw terminals with wires between
16 AWG and 24 AWG, with a ~4–5-mm wire strip length.
The terminal blocks have 5-mm spacing, and are equipped
with 3-mm screws. The field-supplied wires should have
an insulation rating of 600V.

Standard Adapter Board Field Connections
Figure 24. Standard adapter board field connections
3

VSP 10V

24 Vac Y (gnd)

VSP 0–10V

24 Vac B (com)

VSP DC COM

High

Medium

Low

All customer connections to the two adapter boards are
made to the terminal strips on both adapter boards.
Screw terminal blocks provide convenient access to fan
controls for High, Medium, Low, and Variable speed. In
addition, a courtesy 10 Vdc supply is provided for use with
56

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 57 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
an external potentiometer or rheostat. The 10 Vdc supply
supports up to 10 mA draw.
TB3 (right five positions) is normally used to provide 24V
hookup to a wall mounted fan speed switch, and to accept
the returns from the switch for High, Medium, and Low
requests.
TB4 (left three positions) is normally used to control the
system with a 0–10 Vdc output from a thermostat/
controller, or a fan control rheostat/potentiometer.
The terminal block functional assignments and polarity
are shown for reference only, and the schematics that ship
with each unit should be consulted before wiring. Wiring
assignments are configured for each unit.

CSTI Adapter Board Field Connections

13 12 11 10

Low

The terminal block functional assignments and polarity
are shown for reference only, and the schematics that ship
with each unit should be consulted before wiring. Wiring
assignments are configured for each unit.

Adjustment and Configuration of the
Engine Board
WARNING
Safety Alert!
You MUST follow all recommendations below. Failure
to do so could result in death or serious injury.

Figure 25. CSTI adapter board field connections
3

TB4 (left three positions) is normally used to control the
system with a 0–10 Vdc input from a thermostat/controller
with a variable speed output, or a fan control rheostat.

VSP 10V

VSP 0–10V

V1Op/Cooling

VSP DC COM

Not used

24 Vac Y (hot)

10. V1C1 (not std)

Damper Open

11. V2Op/EH1St/Heating

24 Vac Y (gnd)

12. V2C1/EH2St (not std)

High

13. Dmp Cl (not std)

Medium

•

Configuration adjustments to the ECM engine board
should be made through the SMALLER of the two
low-voltage lids on the front of the control panel,
through the low-voltage insulation/shielding.

The CSTI adapter board provides all the hookups of the
standard adapter board, but in addition provides hookups
for valve control (main and auxiliary coils), electric heat
control and damper control.
Screw terminal blocks provide convenient access to fan
controls and to end device control. In addition, a courtesy
10 Vdc supply is provided for use with an external
potentiometer or rheostat. The 10 Vdc supply supports up
to 10 mA draw.
TB3 (right 13 positions) is normally used to provide:

CAUTION
Burn Hazard!
On electric heat units, certain parameter values are
locked out to prevent overheating of the unit. These
functions will appear to be saved; however, they will
not be accepted if the Electric Heat Protection setting is
“On”. Do not change the Electric Heat Protection setting
to “Off” and make changes to the protected settings
unless you are programming an unconfigured service
replacement board to match the unit settings on a ECM
configuration label. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the unit overheating and becoming hot
to the touch, which could result in minor or moderate
injury, and/or equipment damage.

1. 24 Vac supply to a wall fan speed switch or
2. 24 Vac supply to a field-installed unit-mounted
controller, or a wall-mounted controller or thermostat
3. Inputs (returns) for thermostatic fan control: High,
Medium, and Low

Note: The engine board functions and unit specific
settings are summarized on the ECM engine
configuration label affixed to the back side of the
control panel low voltage lid on every unit.

4. Inputs (returns) for cooling/heating requests
5. Inputs (returns) for electric heat requests
6. Inputs (returns) for damper operation requests

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 58 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
The ECM engine board features a nested menu integrated
user interface (UI) that supports:

Figure 26. ECM engine label

1. Status display for instant touch-free confirmation of
unit operation.
2. Configuration parameter and value display and
modification changes (using integrated menu/set
buttons).
3. Error code prioritized reporting.

Status Display
1

Figure 27.

Status display

The ECM engine board contains a four-digit, sevensegment display that is used to present information in a
format close to real-world language, while having a smallform factor. Most characters are immediately
recognizable; however, please consult Table 14 and
Table 15 for the graphical representation of each
alphanumeric character.
Table 14. Screen representation of alphabetical
characters





















































Table 15. Screen representation of numeric characters
1





















Note: Characters on the ECM engine board display
appear in red, on a black background.

1. To check status, configuration, or to change settings on
the engine board with the power on the unit, detach the
low voltage access lid and look or reach through the
low voltage access panel.

The display contains decimal positions as well that change
position with each parameter, as appropriate. Under
normal conditions (i.e., with no error code displayed), the
status will loop the following message:

2. The ECM engine label is affixed to the back or front of
the low voltage access lid.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 59 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
RPM Mode
RUNNING/ FAN STATUS
CONTINUOUS LOOP
Displayed when:
1) No error codes are present
2) Motor has completed ramping


→

→


Indicates the current rpm of Motor 1 in the system. “0” rpm
here indicate that no fan speed has been requested.
Indicates the current rpm of Motor 2 in the system. “0” rpm
here indicate a fan off condition OR a fan “missing”
condition(a).
Indicates the status being calculated or Fan Motor 1. If “off,”
this indicates that either:
1) No fan speed is being requested or
2) The fan performance is failing to meet the request; refer
to “Troubleshooting (ECM),” p. 126 for additional
information.

/


If “on,” this indicates that the fan is performing correctly and
will be used to report fan status correctly, depending on
 mode.
Indicates the status being calculated or Fan Motor 2. If “off,”
this indicates that either:
1) No fan speed is being requested or
2) The fan performance is failing to meet the request; refer
to “Troubleshooting (ECM),” p. 126 for additional
information.
3) If the target speed for Motor 2 is “0,”this is used to
indicate a missing motor(a).

/

/

If “on,” this indicates that the fan is performing correctly and
will be used to report fan status correctly, depending on
 mode.
Indicates that the temperature sensing circuit has
calculated a logical “on” based on the settings of the
following parameters:

//

(a) Motor 1 is the only motor in sizes 200, 300, 400, 600, and 800. Sizes 1000 and 1200 units contain two motors: Motor 1 (single shaft) and Motor 2
(double shaft).

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 60 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
Configuration parameter and value display
and modification changes

Table 16. Button actuation levels

The ECM engine board’s on-board user interface is easy to
use and supports:

Button

Duration

Action

Short Press in
Status Display

<1 sec

None

1. Verification/auditing of on-board parameter settings
(read-only)
2. Adjustment of the on-board settings (write)
Figure 28. User interface input buttons

Menu/Set

Short Press in
Configuration
Display

Toggles between parameter
name and value without saving
(abandons value if changed).

Long Press/Hold
in Status Display

>3 sec

Enters the configuration menu

Long Press/Hold
in Configuration
Display

>3 sec

If on a parameter name, toggles
to the value. If on a parameter
value, saves the value settings
and returns to the parameter
name as confirmation.

Button

Duration

Action

Short Press in
Status Display

<1 sec

None

Short Press in
Configuration
Display

<1 sec

Scrolls through parameter
names, or decreases value of
parameter.

Long Press/Hold
in Status Display

>3 sec

N/A

Long Press/Hold
in Configuration
Display

>3 sec

Faster scroll through parameter
name, or faster decrease of
values of parameters.

Button

Duration

Action

Short Press in
Status Display

<1 sec

None

Short Press in
Configuration
Display

<1 sec

Scrolls through parameter
names, or increases value of
parameter.

Long Press/Hold
in Status Display

>3 sec

N/A

Decrement

The user interface has three input buttons, from left to
right:
1. “Menu/Set”
2. “Decrement”
3. “Increment”
Each button has several different actuation levels
depending on length of press, and what the UI is currently
displaying.

Increment

Long Press/Hold
in Configuration
Display

Faster scroll through parameter
name, or faster increase of
values of parameters.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 61 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
Configuration Use Examples
Example 1. To view the value of parameters without
saving. In this case we wish to verify that the “Low Speed
Value” for Motor 1 is set correctly to 800 rpm.
We start with the ECM engine scrolling status display and
proceed as follows:

It would appear that the value has been changed, but if we
check the value, we notice that the original value has been
retained.

Example 2. We wish to change the change the value of
Low Speed to 820 rpm:
We will continue from the previous example as shown
below, using a long press to “save” the new desired value.
Note: If the display has timed out and returned to the
status loop, repeat Example 1 to arrive back at this
example’s starting point.

Example 3. We wish to double check to see if the value of
“820 rpm” has been saved.

Priority / Error Display
Under special conditions, the status display will interrupt
briefly to prioritize display of events:
Notes:
•

During error displays, the user interface will be
disabled, until the error is removed or resolved.

•

If changes are made to parameters and saved, most
settings take effect immediately. Any change to fan
speeds will take effect and cause the configuration
menu to exit immediately to begin tracking speeds via
the on-board tachometer.

•

Where practical, the unit will offer “limp-in”
performance, but to ensure safe operation, certain unit
functions will be disabled. For example, if one motor
fails, the unit will display an error code, but the second
motor (if present) will continue to operate. However, to
ensure safe operation, the electric heat (if present) will
be disabled.

•

If a error occurs while the configuration menu is in
effect, all unsaved values will be discarded and the
error codes will be displayed.

Note: If the display has timed out and returned to the
status loop, repeat Example 1 and Example 2 to
arrive back at this example’s starting point.

Example 4. We wish to change the value of a protected
value on an electric heat unit.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 62 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
Error Codes
Displayed during
abnormal operation.




Indicates a locked rotor condition of Motor 1. The motor will be locked
out until the cause has been resolved, and the power cycled; refer to
“Troubleshooting (ECM),” p. 126 for resolution details.
Motor 2 will continue to operate, but will not be monitored. Fan Status
function, if being used, will report an inoperative motor. Electric heat
and changeover heat will be shut down.




Indicates a locked rotor condition of Motor 2. The motor will be locked
out until the cause has been resolved, and the power cycled; refer to
“Troubleshooting (ECM),” p. 126 for resolution details.
Motor 1 will continue to operate, but will not be monitored. Fan Status
function, if being used, will report an inoperative motor. Electric heat
and changeover heat will be shut down.




Indicates that Motor 1 has experienced a run-away or over speed
condition, and has been shutdown. The unit will offer limited “limp-in”
performance, and Motor 2 will continue to operate, but will not be
monitored. Fan Status function, if being used, will report an
inoperative motor.
Refer to “Troubleshooting (ECM),” p. 126: to reset, the cause must be
resolved and the power to the unit cycled. Electric heat and changeover
heat will be shut down.




Indicates that Motor 2 has experienced a run-away or over speed
condition, and has been shutdown. The unit will offer limited “limp-in”
performance, and Motor 1 will continue to operate, but will not be
monitored. Fan Status function, if being used, will report an
inoperative motor.
Refer to “Troubleshooting (ECM),” p. 126: to reset, the cause must be
resolved and the power to the unit cycled. Electric heat and changeover
heat will be shut down.


→
→


Indicates the motor is transitioning between speeds, ramping up or
down. The message “RAMP” is briefly displayed, followed by the
target speed for “Motor 1” only. Once the target speed has been
reached, the status display will resume operation.
On power on, the version of software is briefly displayed, followed by
the results of a POST (power on self test).

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 63 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup

Initial Setup and Configuration
After connections of power and hookup of customer
installed controls/fan speed switches and under normal/
operative conditions the only adjustments needed to be
made to the ECM engine board during commissioning of
the unit are:
•

Adjustment and calibration of the variable speed
inputs (VSP/0–10V) on the system, where applicable.

•

Adjustment, calibration or disabling of the optional
auto-changeover function on CSTI units, where
applicable.

WARNING
Safety Alert!
You MUST follow all recommendations below. Failure
to do so could result in death or serious injury.
•

The adapter boards contain high voltage.
Connections to the adapter boards/changes to the
CSTI configuration switches should be made only
with the power to the unit disconnected.

•

In addition, the CSTI adapter board offers configurability
that can be used in special cases to adjust the following
operation of the unit:
•

Courtesy cooling/main valve logic inversion relays for
use with normally open valves

•

Courtesy heating/auxiliary valve logic inversion relays
for use with normally open valves

•

Changeover function for use with changeover coils (in
conjunction with the ECM engine board)

The switches are factory-set based on the model number
configuration as ordered; however, the information is
provided below to aid in the understanding of the
operation of the system.

CAUTION

Configuration
Configuring the ECM Engine Controller
Adjustment and Calibration of the Variable
Speed Inputs (VSP/0–10V)

Burn Hazard!
On electric heat units, certain parameter values are
locked out to prevent overheating of the unit. These
functions will appear to be saved; however, they will
not be accepted if the Electric Heat Protection setting is
“On”. Do not change the Electric Heat Protection setting
to “Off” and make changes to the protected settings
unless you are programming an unconfigured service
replacement board to match the unit settings on a ECM
configuration label. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the unit overheating and becoming hot
to the touch, which could result in minor or moderate
injury, and/or equipment damage.

NOTICE:
Equipment Damage!
You MUST follow all recommendations below. Failure
to do so could result in equipment damage.
•

Care should be taken in the system to use a single
24 Vac supply system to avoid damage to equipment.

•

Care should be taken to observe proper polarity and
grounding in the hookup of the 0–10V system to
avoid damage to equipment.

Notes:
•

UNT-SVX07D-EN

The 0–10V (variable speed) inputs are available for use,
but are not mandatory. The Trane Brushless DC system
63

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 64 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
comes standard with three to five field-accessible
thermostatic inputs (with adjustable speed), so the use
of the 0–10V inputs is optional.
•

All inputs are independently configurable and
simultaneously accessible, and the ECM engine will
choose the highest user (configured and requested)
speed. However, care should be taken with customer
controls to avoid contention of signals.

The ECM engine and adapter boards offer standard,
normalizing 0–10V Variable speed fan inputs for use with
field supplied controllers or thermostats. These inputs can
be used as the only input to the system, used in addition
to the thermostatic (H, M, L) inputs, or not used at all. The
inputs are accessible via 1TB4 on the adapter boards.

For example, if the voltage is only reaching a value of
9.0V at the adapter boards, then the  parameter
should be set to (10/9=)  .. If left un-calibrated, the
unit will never attain maximum speeds, defined as
 and .
4. The ECM engine can accept slightly over-biased inputs
up to 12 Vdc, and the  parameter can be set to a
value less than 1.0 to compensate.

VSP Setup Examples
Example 1:  set too high and  set too high

The ECM engine is factory configured to drive the unit to
a minimum speed (catalogue “low speed” value), defined
as  and  once the analog (0–10V) input is
honored. As a default, the noise floor/threshold is set to
3 percent (0.3V). At 0.3V, the system will drive the motors
to the speeds defined in defined as  and . If the
analogue input goes to 10V, the ECM engine will drive the
motor to maximum speed (normally catalogue “high
speed” value), defined as  and , and will
change speed in response.
Although the ECM engine board ships with settings that
will work with most 0–10 Vdc outputs, calibration should
be performed to maximize response range and controller
authority. Typically, the only settings needed for the VSP
inputs are calibration of the signal to ensure that the
system obeys the following rules:

Example 2:  set too high but  set correctly

1. The minimum output from the field supplied controller
is met with a positive fan response. That is, we do not
want the  setting on the ECM engine board to be
higher than the minimum output of the field supplied
controller, as the ECM engine will “ignore” a portion of
the usable range of the customer fan variable speed
output.
2. The minimum output from the field supplied controller
is not significantly greater than the floor setting 
floor. If the minimum output of the controller is
significantly greater than the floor setting, the first
point that the motor will turn on will be above the
 and  value. The full range of motor control
will not be fully utilized in this case, as the motor will
never reach the low speed motor analogue input
scaling value for Motor 1 and Motor 2 ( and
)

Example 3:  set correctly and  set correctly

3. The maximum output of the controller needs to be 10V,
or if lower, needs to be compensated using the analog
input scaling value,  to normalize the operational
range. As a default, the scaling value is set to 1.00 (so
a voltage of 5V will be graded as 5V); however, to
compensate for long runs or lower max voltages (i.e.,
lower than 10.00), the scaling value can be increased
accordingly to maximize operational range.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 65 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
Use of Potentiometer/Rheostat For VSP

Figure 29. Typical connection

WARNING
Safety Alert!
You MUST follow all recommendations below. Failure
to do so could result in death or serious injury.
•

The adapter boards contain high voltage.
Connections to the adapter boards/changes to the
CSTI configuration switches should be made only
with the power to the unit disconnected.

•

Configuration adjustments to the ECM engine board
should be made through the SMALLER of the two
low-voltage lids on the front of the control panel,
through the low-voltage insulation/shielding.

•

All settings take effect immediately, including fan
startup, enabling of electric heat. Caution should be
taken to stay clear of hazardous voltages, moving
parts and electric heat elements while making
adjustments to the ECM engine board. If it is not
practical to stay clear of these areas during
adjustment of the ECM engine board, please contact
Trane Global Parts for configuration kit that allows
easy powering of the engine board outside of the unit
with a 9V battery.

A courtesy 10-Vdc supply is provided that can support a
10-mA draw. The use of a 1K or a 10K potentiometer is
recommended, and only a stand-alone potentiometer (not
shared with any other electrical system) should be
employed. When a simple potentiometer is used as
depicted in Figure 29, the  setting will define a nullzone (off).
The typical connection is depicted in Figure 29; however,
please consult the unit schematic for the most updated
instruction, as Figure 29 is provided as reference only.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

Adjustment or Disabling of Optional AutoChangeover Function on CSTI Units

WARNING
Safety Alert!
You MUST follow all recommendations below. Failure
to do so could result in death or serious injury.
•

The adapter boards contain high voltage.
Connections to the adapter boards should be made
only with the power to the unit disconnected.

•

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 66 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
The ECM engine board provides additional temperature
controlled logic to help coordinate certain electric-heat
and valve logic functions:
•

On units with electric heat and a changeover coil, the
engine board and adapter boards are pre-configured
to cause hydronic heat and electric heat to be mutually
exclusive:
– On units with ComfortLink™ controls (Tracer ZN
controllers), the Tracer ZN board will serve as the
primary logic to select the electric heat only if hot
water is not available, but the engine board will
service as a backup lockout.
– On units with Customer Supplied Controllers (CSTI
units), the engine board and CSTI board will serve
as the primary lockout.

•

On CSTI units selected with a changeover coil
configuration, the engine board is factory configured
to work in conjunction with the CSTI adapter board to
provide a useful auto-changeover function.
Traditionally, a fixed setpoint bi-metallic disc
temperature switch is used to provide changeover with
customer controls; however, the engine board has
defeatable and configurable bi-metallic disc
temperature switch emulation when combined with
the CSTI adapter board. The ECM engine is
preconfigured for typical values, so changeover
settings do not necessarily need to be changed.

•

When combined with the CSTI adapter board, the bimetallic disc temperature switch emulation and the
electric heat lockout function will work when the
switches are set correctly.

Adjustment and Configuration of the CSTI
Adapter Board

CAUTION
Burn Hazard!
If SW4 is turned off, the factory/customer controller/
thermostat will be able to actuate the electric heat
while hot water is available or if the fans have failed.
This switch should NOT be turned off if the unit
schematic indicates that it should be on, to prevent
overheating of the unit (due to simultaneous electric
heat and hydronic heat actuation, or failure of the fan)
and to use the preferred hydronic heating over electric
heat. Failure to follow this instruction could result in
the unit overheating and becoming hot to the touch,
which could result in minor or moderate injury, and/or
equipment damage.
For CSTI units, the board mounted switches have to be set
appropriately to enable the desired functionality.
Figure 30. CSTI adapter board: board-mounted
switches

– An NTC thermistor is supplied and affixed to the
supply pipes where applicable. The ECM engine
has several settings that affect the operation of the
changeover function:
•

 parameter should normally be set to 
or  to use the changeover functions.

•

 parameter should be chosen if the unit has
a changeover coil without electric heat.

•

 parameter should be chosen if the unit
has a changeover coil with electric heat.
Generally, this will perform the same as the 
parameter but in addition, will disable heating
function on electric heat and on the changeover
coil if there are fan failures. The auxillary heating
coil function will continue to operate and
respond to the customer heating request.

•
•

•

Switch
(L-R)

CSTI adapter board: switch functions
SW1

SW2

SW3

Function

Valve one
operation
logic

Valve two
operation
logic

Changeover Electric Heat /
Function
Fan Proving
Function

SW4

UP position
(towards
terminal
strip)

Normally
Open Valve

Changeover Electric Heat /
Function ON Fan Proving
Function

 parameter should be set to  for CSTI units and
to  for ComfortLink controller units.
 parameter defines the temperature at which the

Normally
Normally
Changeover Electric Heat /
DOWN
Closed Valve Closed Valve Function OFF Fan Proving
position
Function
(towards
black relays)

engine board will close the triac onboard the ECM
engine (if  parameter is set correctly).

Notes:

 parameter defines the temperature at which the

•

All switches are factory-set based on customer
configuration of the unit model number. The unit will
function correctly as shipped; however, the switch
functions and positions are depicted for customer
convenience and for service and troubleshooting aids.

•

SW3 and SW4 work in conjunction with settings on the
ECM engine controller. Simple activation of

engine board will open the triac onboard the ECM
Engine (if  parameter is set correctly). By leaving
a “gap” between the make and break value, we will
simulate hysteresis of a real bi-metallic disc
temperature switch.

Table 17.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 67 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
will perform the same as the  parameter but
will in addition, disable the heating function on
electric heat and on the changeover coil heat if there
are fan failures. The auxiliary heating coil valve will
continue to respond to customer heating requests.

changeover and electric heat lockout function may not
work correctly unless the ECM engine board is
configured to perform these functions.
•

Customers are advised to locate the changeover coil
temperature sensor on the bypass line if possible, to
avoid measuring standing water temperature.

•

If a 4-pipe unit with changeover function is selected,
the heating input will drive the main coil if hot water is
detected, but will always drive the auxiliary coil or
electric heat (where available).

•

Where electric heat is available with a changeover coil,
the electric heat is factory-configured to be deactivated
if there is hot water available and if there is a fan failure.

3. The ECM engine has sensed that there is cold water
available on the supply/bypass line for the changeover
coil. In this case, “cold” water is inferred by the ECM
engine if:
a. A 10K NTC thermistor (similar to Trane part number
X13790374010) is wired properly to the engine
board, through the crossover cables and CSTI
adapter boards.

The CSTI board comes with courtesy valve inversion
relays that allow both normally open and normally closed
two-position valves to be used with simple thermostats
that do not have the configurability to adapt to the
customer choice of valves. Independent switches, SW1
and SW2, are provided for 2-pipe or 4-pipe units, or 2-pipe
units with an optional reheat coil. The functions of SW1
and SW2 is downstream of the changeover function (SW3
and ECM engine board). Decisions made by the
changeover circuits will be flowed to the inversion circuits,
if they are selected.

b. The input impedance of the thermistor circuit must
be set correctly (the  parameter should be set
to  for CSTI units).

SW3 enables or disables the changeover function for
2-pipe changeover coil units, or 4-pipe units where the coil
has both a heating/cooling circuit and a heating circuit
piped internally. If SW3 is turned off, the changeover
function will be disabled, and the unit will then be
configured as a cooling only coil, a heating only coil, or a
combination of cooling only/heating only coil. Thus,
customer cooling requests will drive the main valve, and
heating requests will drive the auxiliary valve.

4. The customer thermostat is properly hooked up the
input strip 1TB3, and is requesting cooling input (V1)
based on the customer cooling setpoint being lower
than the space temperature.

The changeover function is designed to work with
customer controllers that request heating or cooling
(based on customer request), but have coil water
temperatures that are “changed over” from heating to
cooling (or cooling to heating) depending on the season
and the building equipment available. Customer
thermostats MUST be hooked to the correct terminal strip
locations (V1 and V2) for the changeover function to work.

Cooling
In general, the (CSTI) changeover function will provide
cooling if:
1. A unit is factory configured with a changeover coil
(cooling/heating) as the only coil or as the main coil
portion.

c. The temperature sensed is lower than the 
parameter.
d. The  parameter is higher than the 
parameter.
e. The temperature is not in the dead-band between
the  parameter and the  parameter (in
this case, previous state will be retained).

Heating
In general, the (CSTI) changeover function will provide
heating if:
1. A unit is factory-configured with a changeover coil
(cooling/heating) as the only coil or as the main coil
portion.
2. SW3 on the CSTI adapter board is turned on, and the
 parameter set to  or  to use the
changeover functions.
a.

 parameter should be chosen if the unit has a
changeover coil without electric heat.

 parameter should be chosen if the unit has a
changeover coil with electric heat. Generally, this
will perform the same as the  parameter but
will in addition, disable the heating function on
electric heat and on the changeover coil heat if there
are fan failures. The auxiliary heating coil valve will
continue to respond to customer heating requests.

2. SW3 on the CSTI adapter board is turned on, and the
 parameter set to  or  to use the
changeover functions.

3. The ECM engine has sensed that there is hot water
available on the supply/bypass line for the changeover
coil. In this case, “hot” water is determined if:

 parameter should be chosen if the unit has a

 parameter should be chosen if the unit has a

a. A 10K NTC thermistor (similar to Trane part number
X13790374010) is wired properly to the engine
board, through the crossover cables and CSTI
adapter boards.

changeover coil without electric heat.
changeover coil with electric heat. Generally, this
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 68 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
b. The input impedance of the thermistor circuit must
be set correctly (the  parameter should be set
to  for CSTI units).
c. The temperature sensed is higher than the 
parameter.
d. The  parameter is higher than the 
parameter.
e. The temperature is not in the dead-band between
the  parameter and the  parameter (in
this case, previous state will be retained).
4. The customer thermostat is properly hooked up the
input strip 1TB3, and is requesting heating input (V2)
based on the customer heating set point being higher
than the space temperature.

The serial number of each unit and the custom
configuration settings specific to that unit will be printed
on the label for convenient matching of labels/settings to
specific units. Programming a unit with the settings from
another unit will result in abnormal operation. The label
contains four important sections:
1. How to enter the configuration menu
2. The description and meaning of the Error Codes
3. The description and meaning of the status display
4. The parameter names and values specific to that unit
Figure 31.

ECM engine label

5. The heating input on 1TB3 will drive the main
changeover coil IF conditions 1–4 are satisfied, but will
always drive the auxiliary coil valve (if present).
Electric heat will be locked out (where present) if hot
water is available since SW4 will be factory set to “ON”
in these units.
SW4 selects the electric heat lockout function, where we
will lock out the electric heat circuit based on either:
1. The presence of hot water in the changeover coil
section (if the  parameter is set to ).
2. Abnormal behavior of the fan/s (if the  parameter
is set to ).
3. Or a combination of both the presence of hot water or
abnormal behavior of the fan/s (if the  parameter
is set to ).
4. The preceding three examples depend on the
inference of the engine board that hot water is present.
In this case, “hot” water is determined if:
a. The temperature sensed is higher than the 
parameter.
b. The  parameter is higher than the 
parameter.
c. The temperature is not in the dead-band between
the  parameter and the  parameter (in
this case, previous state will be retained).
d. The input impedance of the thermistor circuit must
be set correctly (the  parameter should be set
to  for CSTI units).

Configuring the ECM Engine Board
Every Trane Fan-Coil or Cabinet Heater unit with BLDC
motors will have modules specifically configured at the
factory for the operation of that unit. The ECM engine
configuration label is affixed to the low-voltage access lid
on the outside of the control panel (see Figure 26, p. 58
and Figure 31, p. 68). The ECM engine label may be on the
back-side of the low voltage access lid, depending on the
unit configuration.

Note: This label is provided for reference only, as an
example, and should not be used to configure the
unit.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 69 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
Configuration Settings of the ECM Engine
Board

WARNING

3. If the format setting for rpm values are not correct (i.e.,
not four-digit: XXXX), please check the operation mode
of the ECM engine board  and  and motor
signal output format  and .

Safety Alert!
You MUST follow all recommendations below. Failure
to do so could result in death or serious injury.
All settings take effect immediately, including fan
startup and enabling of electric heat. Caution should be
taken to stay clear of hazardous voltages, moving parts
and electric heat elements while making adjustments
to the ECM engine board. If it is not practical to stay
clear of these areas during adjustment of the ECM
engine board, please contact Trane Global Parts for
configuration kit that allows easy powering of the
engine board outside of the unit with a 9V battery.
The adapter boards contain high voltage. Configuration
adjustments to the ECM engine board should be made
through the SMALLER of the two low-voltage lids on
the front of the control panel, through the low-voltage
insulation/shielding.

NOTICE:
Equipment Damage!
Do not change the PWM output voltage settings as
motor damage could occur.
Note: The engine board functions and unit specific
settings are summarized on the ECM engine
configuration label affixed to the back side of the
control panel low voltage lid, on every unit.
The following table lists the parameter names and typical
settings of the ECM engine board, for reference only.
Additional Notes:
1. This list is applicable only to Fan-coil and Force-Flo
products.
2. Do not change the electric heat protection settings if
your unit has electric heat.
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 70 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
Table 18. Configuration settings of the ECM engine board

Description on
Unit Label
Mtr 1 High Spd
Mtr 1 Med Spd
Mtr 1 Low Spd
EHStg1 Mtr1 Spd

EH Stg 2 Mtr 1 Spd

User
Interface
Name

Typical
User
Interface
Value















Notes:

Description
Sets the high-speed rpm for Motor 1.
Sets the medium-speed rpm for Motor 1.
Sets the low-speed rpm for Motor 1.
Assigns an rpm to be associated with a call
for 1st stage electric heat, for Motor 1 (only
on units equipped with electric heat).
Assigns an rpm to be associated with a call
for 2nd stage electric heat, for Motor 1
(only on electric heat equipped units).

These notes are provided for reference
only, and the ECM engine label must be
used as the ultimate guide for setting up an
engine board on specific units.
Do not exceed 1700 rpm.
Do not set under 450 rpm.
On units with two motors, the single shafted
motor is designated as Motor 1.
If the unit has only one motor, all seven speed
settings for the second motor (
,
,
,
,
,
,
)
should be set to zero.

 
    

Analog inputs below the
rejected.

 setting will be

   

,
,
,
settings
Note:
are locked out on units with electric heat.

AI High Spd Mtr 1





Sets the maximum rpm for Motor 1 for the
maximum input value of the analog input.

AI Low Spd Mtr 1





Sets the minimum turn-on rpm for
Motor 1, when the analog input becomes
active.

Mtr 2 Hgh Spd











Sets the high-speed rpm for Motor 2.

EH Stg 2 Mtr 2 Spd





Assigns an rpm to be associated with a call
for 2nd stage electric heat, for Motor 2
(only on electric heat equipped units).

AI High Spd Mtr 2





Sets the maximum rpm for Motor 2 for the
maximum input value of the analog input.

AI Low Spd Mtr 2





Sets the minimum turn-on rpm for
Motor 2, when the analog input becomes
active.

Op Mode Mtr 1













Sets the operational mode for Motor 1.

Mtr 1 PWM Volt





Sets the PWM voltage, for cases when the
PWM outputs are used.

This setting must NOT be changed, as damage to
the motor may occur!

Mtr 2 PWM Volt





Sets the PWM voltage, for cases when the
PWM outputs are used.

This setting must NOT be changed, as damage to
the motor may occur!

Mt1 Hgh PWM Lt





Sets the maximum output % that the
controller will request from Motor 1.

This envelope protection value should not be
altered.

Mt1 Low PWM Lt



.

Sets the minimum maximum output %
that the controller will request from
Motor 1.

This envelope protection value should not be
altered.

Mt2 Hgh PWM Lt





Sets the maximum output % that the
controller will request from Motor 2.

This envelope protection value should not be
altered.

Mt2 Low PWM Lt



.

Sets the minimum maximum output %
that the controller will request from
Motor 2.

This envelope protection value should not be
altered.

Mt1 Ovspd RPM





Selects the rpm above which the Motor 1
will be assumed to be in an overspeed
condition and will need to be shut down.

This envelope protection value should not be
altered.

Mtr 2 Med Spd
Mtr 2 Low Spd
EHStg1 Mtr2 Spd

Op Mode Mtr 2
Mtr 1 Out Format
Mtr 2 Out Format
Mtr 1/2 PWM Freq.

Sets the medium-speed rpm for Motor 2.
Sets the low-speed rpm for Motor 2.
Assigns an rpm to be associated with a call
for 1st stage electric heat, for Motor 2 (only
on electric heat equipped units).

Sets the operational mode for Motor 2.
Sets the interface type for Motor 1.
Sets the interface type for Motor 2
Sets the PWM frequency, for cases when
the PWM outputs are used.

 for fan-coil products.
Must be set to  for fan-coil products.
Must be set to  for fan-coil products.
Must be set to  for fan coil products.
On fan-coil units, the  must not be
Must be set to

changed.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 71 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
Table 18. Configuration settings of the ECM engine board (continued)
Notes:

User
Interface
Name

Typical
User
Interface
Value

Mt2 Ovspd RPM





Selects the rpm above which the Motor 2
will be assumed to be in an overspeed
condition and will need to be shut down.

This envelope protection value should not be
altered.

Fan Proving Fct





Selects which mode should be assigned to
the Binary output circuit, depending on
unit type.

This setting has to be correct for proper unit
operation of electric heat and changeover units.

AI Boost Amp





Boosts or attenuates the analog input
signal to compensate for long wire runs.

A value of
should be used if no voltage level
compensation is needed (i.e., voltage peak is at
10 Vdc).

AI Floor



.

Rejects noise on the analog input lines and
sets up the engine board to turn on if the
thermostat or controller is commanding its
analog outputs on.

PulsePerRev





Sets up the tachometer function to be
compatible with the on-board motor and
for correct speed calculation and
calibration.

Do not change this setting as this is critical to
proper unit operation.

P Value Mtr 1



.

Sets up the on board closed loop control to
control Motor 1 with proper stability.

Do not change this setting.

I Value Mtr 1



.

Sets up the on board closed loop control to
control Motor 1 with proper stability.

Do not change this setting.

P Value Mtr 2



.

Sets up the on board closed loop control to
control Motor 2 with proper stability.

Do not change this setting.

I Value Mtr 2



.

Sets up the on board closed loop control to
control Motor 2 with proper stability.

Do not change this setting.

Ht Sens Mk Val F





Sets the make value for the engine board
triac output based on the thermistor input.

 settings.

Ht Sens Bk Val F





Sets the break value for the engine board
triac output based on the thermistor input.

 settings.

Ht Sens Resistor





Sets the input impedance of the thermistor
input.

Should be pre-set to “OUT” for Tracer ZN
controllers.

Mt 1 Ramp %/sec





Sets the ramp rate for Motor 1, in % per
second.

Mt 2 Ramp %/sec





Sets the ramp rate for Motor 2, in % per
second

EH Rmp Accel





Sets the acceleration factor for the electric
heat inputs.

Is used to force faster ramps when electric heat
is requested.

Ramp MAX Time





Sets the maximum ramp time for both
Motor 1 and Motor 2 (in seconds).

Overrides the ramp rates
and
the calculated ramp time exceeds

EH Fan off delay





Selects how long the fan needs to stay on
after an electric heat request has been
turned off.

Not used on fan-coil unit.

Lck Rtr Protect





Selects whether to use the on-board
locked rotor protection function.

This will shut down the affected motor, if
rotational response is not detected.

Description on
Unit Label

UNT-SVX07D-EN

Description

These notes are provided for reference
only, and the ECM engine label must be
used as the ultimate guide for setting up an
engine board on specific units.



Operation also depends on

, , and

Operation also depends on

, , and



 if
.

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 72 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Overview and Setup
Table 18. Configuration settings of the ECM engine board (continued)

Description on
Unit Label
Protect Funct

User
Interface
Name

Typical
User
Interface
Value





Notes:

Description

These notes are provided for reference
only, and the ECM engine label must be
used as the ultimate guide for setting up an
engine board on specific units.

This function protects settings on the
board that affect the safety of the electric
heat system.

Do NOT change this setting. This setting locks
out the following parameters from being
changed, for safe operation of the unit.














Rmp dft (auto rst)





This function shortens the ramps for faster
unit commissioning and auto-resets to off
after approximately 15 minutes of poweron operation.

Soft Rev



.

Displays the software version.

Fan Speed Response Verification
1. After performing controller specific commissioning,
observe the display on the ECM engine board with the
power on, to the unit. The ECM engine display should
display a looping status indicator as follows:

→→→→→
→→
→→

Notes:
•

The  indicator is unit-specific and may indicate
“Off” at this point; refer to thermistor function for more
information.

•

A representative fan speed of “1080” rpm are shown in
the example below. Each unit is factory-configured
differently and will have different settings for different
fan speeds.

2. While the unit remains on, exercise the fan controls on
the unit, either directly or indirectly through request for
unit heat/cool. Observe the fan spinning, and then
observe the fan display on the ECM engine board. It
should display a looping status indicator as follows:

To aid in commissioning of the unit, for
approximately 10–15 minutes, the ramps will be
shortened to quickly observe proper unit
behavior and response to speeds.

For a size 200, 300, 400, 600, or 800 unit (using typical
unit operating fan speeds):

→→→→
→→→
→→
For a size 1000 or 1200 unit (using typical unit
operating fan speeds):

→→→→
→→→
→→
Note: The  indicator is unit-specific and may
indicate “Off” at this point; refer to thermistor
function for more information.
3. OPTIONAL:
While the fan is running, if practical, change the fan
speeds and observe the display temporarily indicate:



Exercise all fan speeds to ensure positive unit
response and to validate any field wiring.
Congratulations! Your new Trane BLDC Engine/Motor
system is performing properly.
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 73 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wired Controllers—Communication Wiring
Wiring Installation (ZN510 and
ZN520)
Tracer ZN510 and ZN520 controllers are LonTalk® devices
that interface with the Trane Tracer Summit building
management system. Reference the unit wiring diagram
or submittals.
Ground shields at each Tracer ZN510 and ZN520, taping
the opposite end of each shield to prevent any connection
between the shield and anther ground. Refer to the most
recent version of Trane publication CNT-SVX04A-EN
(Tracer ZN.520 Unit Controller: Installation, Operation and
Programming Guide) for the communication wiring
diagram.
Communication wire must conform to the following
specification:
1. Shielded twisted pair 18 AWG

Wire Characteristics
Controller communication-link wiring must be low
capacitance, 18-gage, shielded, twisted pair with stranded,
tinned-copper conductors. For daisy chain configurations,
limit the wire run length to 5,000 ft. Truck and branch
configurations are significantly shorter. LonTalk wire
length limitations can be extended through the use of a
link repeater.

Recommended Communication Wiring
Practices
The following guidelines should be followed while
installing communication wire.
•

LonTalk is not polarity sensitive. Trane recommends
that the installer keep polarity consistent throughout
the site.

•

Only strip away two inches maximum of the outer
conductor of shielded cable.

•

Make sure that the 24 Vac power supplies are
consistent in how they are grounded. Avoid sharing
24 Vac between LonTalk UCMs.

•

Avoid over-tightening cable ties and other forms of
cable wraps. A tight tie or wrap could damage the
wires inside the cable.

•

Do not run LonTalk cable alongside or in the same
conduit as 24 Vac power.

•

In an open plenum, avoid lighting ballasts, especially
those using 277 Vac.

•

Do not use a trunk and branch configuration, if
possible. Trunk and branch configurations shorten the
distance cable can be run.

2. Capacitance 23 (21–25) picofarads (pF) per foot
3. Listing/Rating—300 V 150C NEC 725-2 (b) Class 2 Type
CL2P
4. Trane Part No. 400-20-28 or equivalent, available
through Trane BAS Buying Group Accessories catalog.
Note: Communication link wiring is a shielded, twisted
pair of wire and must comply with applicable
electrical codes.
Follow these general guidelines when installing
communication wiring on units with a Tracer ZN510 or
ZN520 controller:
•

Maintain a maximum 5000 ft. aggregate run.

•

Install all communication wiring in accordance with
the NEC and all local codes.

•

Solder the conductors and insulate (tape) the joint
sufficiently when splicing communication wire. Do not
use wire nuts to make the splice.

•

Do not pass communication wiring between buildings
because the unit will assume different ground
potentials.

•

Do not run power in the same conduit or wire bundle
with communication link wiring.

Wiring Installation (Tracer UC400)
This section provides information about wiring the UC400
controller. For more detailed information, refer to the
Tracer UC400 Programmable Controller Installation,
Operation, and Maintenance Manual (BAS-SVX20C-EN, or
the most recent revision).

Note: You do not need to observe polarity for LonTalk
communication links.

Device Addressing
LonTalk devices are given a unique address by the
manufacturer. This address is called a Neuron ID. Each
Tracer ZN510 and ZN520 controller can be identified by its
unique Neuron ID, which is printed on a label on the
controller’s logic board. The Neuron ID is also displayed
when communication is established using Tracer Summit
or Rover service tool. The Neuron ID format is
00-01-64-1C-2B-00.
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 74 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wired Controllers—Communication Wiring

Wiring Overview Outline

or part of the BACnet Device ID (refer to the illustration
below).
IMC

General
Instructions
(p. 74)

24
VAC
XFRM

AO1
BI4

AO2
BI5

UI1

UI2

BACnet MS/TP
Link

LINK IMC

TX
RX

SERVICE
SERVICE TOOL

4 56

x10

BO1 BO2 BO3

BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9

x100

ADDRESS
9 1

4 56

Connection
Wiring (p. 75)

Setting the
Address (p. 74)

CONNECT AC POWER TO THE TRAIC SUPPLY TO POWER THE TRIACS

Power Supply

Wiring
Requirements
(p. 76)

BO1
NC

RELAYS
BO2
NC
C

TRIAC SUPPLY
NO

BO3
NC

TRIACS
BO4

BO5 BO6

BO7 BO8 B

BO9 A

Use a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) flathead screwdriver to set rotary address
dials. Dials rotate in either direction.
Power ON Check
(p. 76)

General Instructions
Conformance to Regulatory Standards

MAC Address. The MAC Address is required by the RS485 communication protocol on which BACnet operates. A
UC400 controller can use a MAC Address from 001 to 120.
Important:

All wiring must comply with the National Electrical Code
(NEC™) and local electrical codes.

Connecting Wires to Terminals

Each device on the link must have a unique
MAC Address/Device ID. The controller
rotary addresses should be sequentially set,
with no gaps in the numbering, starting with
001 on each link (for example 001, 002, 003,
004 and so on). A duplicate address or a 000
address setting will interrupt
communications and cause the Tracer SC
device installation process to fail.

BACnet Device ID. The BACnet Device ID is required by
the BACnet network. Each device must have a unique
number from 001 to 4094302.

BACnet networks without a Tracer SC system
controller
On BACnet networks without a Tracer SC system
controller, the Device ID can be assigned one of two ways:
•

It can be the same number as the MAC Address,
determined by the rotary address dials on the UC400
controller. For example, if the rotary address dials are
set to 042, both the MAC Address and the BACnet
Device ID are 042.

•

It can be soft set using the Tracer TU service tool. If the
BACnet Device ID is set using the Tracer TU service
tool, the rotary address dials only affect the MAC
Address, they do not affect the BACnet Device ID.

To connect wires to the UC400 controller or the expansion
modules:
1. Strip the wires to expose 0.28 inch (7 mm) of bare wire.
2. Insert the wire into a terminal connector.
3. Tighten the terminal screw to 0.5 to 0.6 N-m (71 to
85 ozf-in or 4.4 to 5.3 lbf-in.).
4. Tug on the wires after tightening the screws to ensure
all wires are secure as shown on the right.

BACnet MS/TP Link
Setting the Address
The rotary address dials on the UC400 controller serve one
or two purposes depending upon the network: they are
always used for the MAC Address, which is sometimes all
74

BACnet networks with a Tracer SC system
controller
On BACnet networks with a Tracer SC system controller,
the Device ID for the UC400 controller is always soft set by
the system controller using the following scheme
illustrated below.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 75 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wired Controllers—Communication Wiring
Note: The BACnet Device ID is displayed as the Software
Device ID on the Tracer TU Controller Settings
page in the Protocol group.
Lin Link
k1 2

Power Supply
Please read all of the warnings, cautions, and notices
below before proceeding with this section.

UC400

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!

7 8

2 3

7 8

90 1

2 3

7 8

ADDRESS
90 1

90 1

7 8

ADDRESS
90 1

90 1
4 56

4 56

x100

x10

x100

x10

BACnet
Device ID for
this UC400

= 0012001

CAUTION
Personal Injury and Equipment Damage!

The last three digits
are determined by the
rotary address dials
on the UC400
controller.

The first three digits
are determined by the
address rotary dials on
the Tracer SC system
controller.

After installation, make sure to check that the 24 Vac
transformer is grounded through the controller. Failure
to check could result in personal injury and/or damage
to equipment. Measure the voltage between chassis
ground and any ground terminal on the UC400
controller. Expected result: Vac £ 4.0 V

The fourth digit is
determined by the link
number to which the
UC400 controller is
attached.

Connection Wiring
Field-supplied BACnet MS/TP link wiring must be installed
in compliance with NEC and local codes. The wire must be
low-capacitance, 18-gauge, stranded, tinned-copper,
shielded, twisted-pair. The illustration below shows an
example of BACnet link wiring with multiple UC400
controllers.
Note: For more details, refer to Wiring Guide: Unit
Controller Wiring for the Tracer SC™ System
Controller (BAS-SVN03D-EN, or the most recent
revision).

+
VDC
BI

LINK

+
VDC

IMC

LINK

NOTICE:
Avoid Equipment Damage!
Sharing 24 Vac power between controllers could cause
equipment damage.
A separate transformer is recommended for each UC400
controller. The line input to the transformer must be
equipped with a circuit breaker sized to handle the
maximum transformer line current.
If a single transformer is shared by multiple UC400
controllers:
•

The transformer must have sufficient capacity.

•

Polarity must be maintained for every UC400
controller powered by the transformer.

+
VDC

IMC

Disconnect all electric power, including remote
disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/
tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be
inadvertently energized. Failure to disconnect power
before servicing could result in death or serious injury.

IMC

+
AI

LINK

RX
SERVI

SERVICE TOOL

UC400

Zone
Sensor

+
VDC
BI

LINK

IMC

+
AI

LINK

TX
RX
SERVI
SERVICE TOOL

RX
SERVI

SERVICE TOOL

Tracer SC

SERVI
SERVICE TOOL

UC400

Zone
Sensor
Zone sensor
communications
jack wiring

Important:

If the polarity is inadvertently reversed
between two controllers powered by the
same transformer, a difference of 24Vac will
occur between the grounds of each
controller, which can result in:
•
•
•

Partial or full loss of communication on
the entire BACnet MS/TP link
Improper function of the UC400
controller outputs
Damage to the transformer or a blown
transformer fuse

Trane BACnet
Terminator

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 76 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wired Controllers—Communication Wiring
Transformer Recommendations
A 24Vac power supply must be used for proper operation
of the binary inputs, which requires 24Vac detection. In
addition, the spare 24Vac outputs may be used to power
relays and TRIACS.
•

•

24Vac
transformer
A pigtail connection may be
necessary between earth ground
and/or enclosure ground if the
device is not grounded through
one leg of the transformer wiring.

AC transformer requirements: UL listed, Class 2 power
transformer, 24Vac ±15%, device max load 24VA. The
transformer must be sized to provide adequate power
to the controller (12VA) and outputs (maximum 12VA
per binary output).
CE-compliant installations: The transformer must be
CE marked and SELV compliant per IEC standards.

Alternate ground method.
IMC

24
VAC
XFRM

24
VAC

AO1
BI4

AO2
BI5

24
VAC

BI1

UI1

UI2

BI2

LINK

BI3

AI1

AI2

AI4

AI3

Wiring Requirements

SERVICE

4 56

Connecting Wires

BO1 BO2 BO3

BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9

4 56

The controller must receive AC power from
a dedicated power circuit; failure to comply
may cause the controller to malfunction. DO
NOT run AC power wires in the same wire
bundle with input/output wires; failure to
comply may cause the controller to
malfunction due to electrical noise.

ADDRESS
9 1

Important:

SERVICE TOOL

18 AWG (0.823 mm2) copper wire is recommended for
the circuit between the transformer and the controller.

LINK IMC

•

A dedicated power circuit disconnect switch must be
near the controller, easily accessible by the operator,
and marked as the disconnecting device for the
controller.

To ensure proper operation of the UC400 controller, install
the power supply circuit in accordance with the following
guidelines:
•

IMC

+24
VDC

IMC

AI5

CONNECT AC POWER TO THE TRAIC SUPPLY TO POWER THE TRIACS

BO1
NC

RELAYS
BO2
NC
C

TRIAC SUPPLY
NO

BO3
NC

TRIACS
BO4

BO5 BO6

BO7 BO8 B

BO9 A

Power ON Check
To perform a Power ON check:
1. Verify that the 24Vac connector and the chassis ground
are properly wired.
2. Remove the lockout/tagout from the line voltage power
to the electrical cabinet.
3. Energize the transformer to apply power to the UC400
controller.
4. Observe the UC400 controller when power is applied
to verify the power check sequence as follows:

To connect the wires:

a. The power LED lights red for 1 second

1. Disconnect power to the transformer.

b. The power LED lights green

2. Connect the 24Vac secondary wires from the
transformer to the 24Vac and
terminals on the
UC400 controller (refer to the illustration below).

• If the sequence above is completed as described,
the controller is properly booted and ready for the
application code.

3. Do one of the following to ensure the controller is
adequately grounded:

If the power LED flashes red, a fault condition exists.

• Connect a grounding pigtail at some point along the
secondary wire that runs between the controller
terminal and the transformer.
• Ground one of the
terminals on the controller to
the enclosure (if the enclosure is adequately
grounded) or to an alternate earth ground.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 77 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wireless Sensors

Wireless Sensors
Note: Receivers ship installed on the unit. To remove the
receiver, press in the retention tabs on the
underside of the receiver enclosure (see Figure 32)
and push upward.
Note: For more detailed information for wireless sensors,
please see BAS-SVX04E-EN
Figure 32. Retention tabs on underside of receiver
enclosure

Note: Do not use 000 as an address. An address of
000 returns the receiver outputs to their factory
defaults (zone temperature and setpoint
outputs: 72.5°F, removes all association
knowledge, and prevents association with a
sensor.
Figure 33. Setting the rotary address switches on the
receiver and the sensor

LESS
LE
WIRELESS
INSTALL
A
TALL
TA
LED4
L
LED1

S4
LED2

LED2

LED3

LED3
SIGNAL
LED5

POWER

Address Setting
The process of establishing communication between a
receiver and sensor is referred to as association. The
following limitations apply:
•

Each associated receiver/sensor set that
communicates within the reception range of the
wireless system must have a unique address.

ADD
DRESS
C33

C34
J1

HEATING SET
S5 FAN/SYSTEM
SETPOINT
ZONE
GND
24VAC/DC
GND
COMM +
COMM -

C35
R77

Receiver
Do not remove the
insulation strip yet.

It is not possible to associate more than one sensor to a
receiver, nor is it possible to associate more than one
receiver to a sensor.
To associate a receiver and sensor, the two devices must
have their rotary address switches set to the same
address.

B1 +

Pb
Pb-FREE
LED1
LED2

Important:

To set the receiver and sensor addresses:
1. Using a small screwdriver, set the three rotary address
switches (locations S1, S2, S3) on the receiver to an
address between 001 and 999 (see Figure 33). You do
not have to remove the covers to access the rotary
address switches.

LED3

SIGNAL
LED5

BATTERY
STATUS

S3
LED4

Set the addresses before applying power to
the receiver
and before removing the
DRESS
insulation strip (Figure 33) from the sensor.

ADDRESS

STATUS

S4
WIRELESS
INSTALL

Sensor

2. Set the three rotary address switches (locations S1, S2,
S3) on the sensor to the same address as the receiver
(see Figure 33).

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 78 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wireless Sensors
Note: Do not use 000 as an address. An address of
000 removes all association knowledge, reverts
the sensor to a low-power hibernation mode,
and sends a disassociation request to the
receiver.

2. Verify that the sensor is set to the same address as the
receiver it is to be associated with.
3. Power the sensor by removing the insulation strip from
between the two batteries.

3. Record the address and location of the receiver and
sensor pair.

Observing the Receiver for Readiness to
Associate
After initial power up, the receiver conducts a channel scan
for 20 seconds. During this time, the receiver selects from
16 available channels the clearest channel on which to
operate. LED1, LED2, and LED3 flash rapidly in succession
(round-robin style) while the channel scan is in progress,
as shown in part 1 of the illustration.
Important:

Do not attempt association (leave the
insulation strip in place) until the channel
scan is finished.

After the channel scan is finished, LED3 begins blinking
(one-blink pattern) to show that the receiver is ready to be
associated with a sensor (see part 2 of the following
figure).

Association is automatically initiated between the sensor
and the receiver. When LED3 on the receiver stops
blinking, association has been established.
If the first association attempt is unsuccessful, the sensor
automatically re-attempts association with the receiver
every 10 minutes.

0
Sec.
20

Note: An associated sensor that has lost communication
with the receiver will transmit an association
request every 50 minutes. You can manually
initiate association (see “Manual Association
(Wireless Controls),” p. 120”).

Testing Signal Strength and Battery Status
To verify that the association process was successful and
that the batteries have adequate charge:
1. Firmly press and release the Test button on the bottom
of the sensor (as illustrated below).

2. For model WZS, view LED1, LED2, and LED3 to
determine the signal strength. View LED5 to determine
the battery status (see the following figure for model
WZS sensors).
Note: The LEDs will turn Off after 5 seconds to
conserve battery strength.

LED3

Associating the Sensor to the Receiver
To associate the sensor to the receiver:
1. Remove the sensor cover by firmly pressing the thumb
tab at the bottom of the cover and pulling the cover
away from the back plate.

For model WDS, determine the signal strength and
battery status by viewing the symbols on the sensor
display (see the following figure for model WDS
sensors).
3. Record the results in your commissioning statement.
Note: For more information, see “Testing Signal Strength
(Wireless Controls),” p. 118 and “Testing Battery
Status (Wireless Controls),” p. 118.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 79 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wireless Sensors
Model WDS sensor

Model WZS sensor

LED1
LED2
LED3
LED5

Test button

Test button
Push firmly,
then release
Push firmly,
then release

Configuring the Wireless Display Sensor
(Model WDS only)
Note: Sensors shipped with the fan-coil are preconfigured for three speeds.
The configuration of the sensor determines which system
features can be accessed and changes can be made by the
tenant (for example, changes to cooling/heating mode,
setpoint, or fan speed. Verify system and associated unit
features before configuring the sensor.
The building owner or operator may choose to limit tenant
access to certain features. This can be done through
configuration. Or, if a sensor is configured to match all
control capabilities of the building automation system, the
locking feature can be used to restrict the tenant from
making changes.

Configuration Procedure
To configure settings on the model WDS sensor, follow
this procedure in the order presented.
1. Press the configuration button for 3 seconds.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 80 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wireless Sensors

Configuration
button

The display will change to configuration mode. When the
sensor is in configuration mode, a wrench symbol appears
on the display and the menus are separated by lines, as
illustrated below.

2. Press the center button on the keypad to begin the
configuration process.

Center button

3. Configure the sensor options in the order shown in the
table.
• Press
or
illustrated).
• Press
or
illustrated).

to scroll to the next selection (as
to move to the next menu (as

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 81 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wireless Sensors
Setting
Temperature
• Choose Fahrenheit or Celsius
• Choose the degree resolution
(whole degrees, half degrees, or
tenths of degrees).

Configuration Options

Setpoint

no
setpoint

single
setpoint

dual setpoint

System

no system
options enabled
Fan

(Default)

Note: Not all fan options are available
for all systems.

auto/off

auto/off/
low/high

auto/off/low
med/high

off/high (on)

off/low/high

off/low/
med/high

no fan options
enabled

Occupancy (timed override)

4. Review the display to ensure that you have selected the
correct configuration.

2. Press the up and down arrows for 3 seconds. The arrow
indicates setpoint display, as shown in the figure.

5. To return the display to operating mode, press the
configuration button (see Step 1, p. 79).
Note: The sensor will revert to operating mode if no
buttons are pressed for 10 minutes.

Optional Features
Displaying Setpoint or Temperature. You can
configure the sensor to display either the temperature
(default) or setpoint. To select either option:
1. Verify that the sensor is in operating mode and at the
home screen.
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 82 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wireless Sensors
Arrow
indicates
setpoint is
shown on
display

Sensor Operations
Temporary Occupancy (Timed Override)
Temporary occupancy (timed override) is available on
model WDS. Temporary occupancy is selected for afterbusiness-hours adjustment of temperature setting, fan
settings, or heat/cool settings, when the system has
changed to unoccupied mode. System control will revert
to unoccupied after a pre-determined time period.
Note: Not all systems support the occupancy function.

Model WDS Sensor

Locking or Unlocking Settings. You can lock or unlock

To request and cancel temporary occupancy on a model
WDS sensor, see “Requesting Temporary Occupancy,”
p. 83.

the setpoint, system, or fan setting to prevent changes.

End-of-Range Temperature Values

To lock or unlock a setting:

Receiver: The end-of-range temperature limits of the
receiver for all models are 32°F to 122°F. The receiver
cannot replicate temperature values outside this range. If
the sensor transmits a temperature value to the receiver
that is out of the receiver replication range, the receiver
will “freeze” the output at the end-of-range values. This
value will remain frozen until the transmitted temperature
moves to between the end-of-range temperature limits.

1. Verify that the sensor is in operating mode and at the
home screen.
2. Choose a setting to lock or unlock:
• Select the setpoint by pressing the up or down
arrow.

Sensor: The end-of-range temperature setpoint limits for
the model WDS sensor is 50°Fto 89.6°F.
Setpoint

• From the system menu press the down arrow to
select the fan menu. Use the left or right arrow to
choose the setting.

Receiver Power-up Sequence
When power is applied to the receiver, one of the following
sequences occurs. The sequence is dependent on the
address setting and the association status of the receiver.
Address set to 000 and receiver is not associated
with a sensor

Fan menu

3. Press the left and right arrows for 4 seconds.

•

LED5 is constantly On, indicating power is applied and
the receiver is functional.

•

All models: Zone temperature and cooling setpoint
default to 72.5°F.
WDS only: The heating setpoint defaults to 70.5°F and
the fan/system output will be 2230 Ω (see “Output
Values—Failure and Default Modes of Operation
(Wireless Controls),” p. 121).

•

Status LED3 will display a 2-blink pattern diagnostic
(Table 45, p. 118).

Address set from 001 to 999 and receiver is not
associated with a sensor

Note: If you try to access a feature that is locked, the
locked symbol
will appear on the display.
If you press a keypad button to try change a locked
setting, the locked symbol will flash.

•

LED5 is constantly On, indicating power is applied and
the receiver is functional.

•

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 83 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wireless Sensors
•

The receiver conducts an energy scan for 20 seconds to
determine the clearest channel on which to operate.

•

LED3 flashes On every 2 seconds when it is ready to
accept a sensor association request. When an
association request is made by a sensor, the receiver
instructs the sensor on which power level to operate.
Then the receiver and sensor begin operation at the
appropriate channel and power level (see “Observing
the Receiver for Readiness to Associate,” p. 78).

Address set from 001 to 999 (and not changed since
most recent power-up) and receiver is associated
with a sensor
•

LED5 is constantly On, indicating power is applied and
the receiver is functional.

•

Zone temperature and setpoint default to 72.5°F. WDS
only: Heating setpoint defaults to 70.5°F, Fan = Auto,
System = Off.

•

The receiver waits for a broadcast transmission from
its associated sensor. When a transmission is received,
the receiver positions its zone temperature and
setpoint outputs appropriately.

•

If the receiver does not receive a communicated signal
from its associated sensor within 35 minutes, zone
temperature and setpoint outputs fail, generating a
unit controller alarm (see “Output Values—Failure and
Default Modes of Operation (Wireless Controls),”
p. 121).

Note: Once a receiver communicates to a WZS sensor,
the receiver disables (opens) its zone setpoint
output indefinitely.

Sensor Transmission Time and Temperature
Variables
Sensor transition time variables are as follows:
•

The maximum time between sensor temperature
transmissions is 15 minutes.

•

The minimum time between sensor temperature
transmissions is 30 seconds.

•

The minimum time for transmitting temperature
setpoint changes is 10 seconds.

Note: If a sensor transmits a message to the receiver and
the receiver does not reply, the sensor will
retransmit the message to the receiver every 30
seconds until communication to the receiver is reestablished.
Sensor temperature time variables are as follows:
•

The minimum change in zone temperature required to
force a sensor transmission is:

•

The minimum change in temperature setpoint
required to force a sensor transmission is:
– 0.1°C for a model WDS sensor

Operating Mode (Model WDS)
This section describes how to operate the Trane wireless
sensor, model WDS. Figure 34 shows an example of a
model WDS that has been configured and is in operating
mode.
Figure 34. Wireless sensor (model WDS) in operating
mode

Temperature

Fan settings
Test symbols (appear only
when Test button is pushed
Occupancy
indicator/Error code

Keypad

Test button

Changing Room Temperature

This symbol
shows the
current room
temperature, or
your setpoint
selection while
you are making
an adjustment.
When you select
a setpoint, this
symbol
appears.

1. To increase the room
temperature, press
.
To decrease the room
temperature, press
.
2. To confirm, press
or wait 5 seconds.
The display will return
to the home screen.

Changing Heating and Cooling Room Temperature
Settings (applies to some systems)
Changing the Fan Setting
Requesting Temporary Occupancy

– 0.2°F when the temperature range is between 60°F
and 80°F

Error Codes

– 0.5°F when the temperature range is between 32°F
and 60°F or between 80°F and 122°F

Lock Symbol

UNT-SVX07D-EN

System settings (not available for
fan-coil or Force-Flo units)

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 84 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wireless Sensors
Some systems allow
you to select both
heating and cooling
room temperature
settings. If your
system has this
option, this symbol
appears when you
adjust the
temperature setting.
When you adjust the
cooling setting, the
top arrow and
snowflake flash.
When you adjust the
heating setting, the
bottom arrow and
flame flash.

1. Press
or
to
select the heating/
cooling setting.

The lock symbol appears if you try to
adjust a setting that cannot be
changed.

2. If in cooling mode,
press
to change to
heating mode. If in
heating mode, press
to change to cooling
mode.
3. Press
or
to
select the heating/
cooling setting.
4. To confirm, press
or
wait 5 seconds. The
home screen will
appear.

Indicates that the
fan will operate as
needed to reach
the selected
temperature.

1. From the home screen,
activate the fan setting
menu by pressing
and then
.

Indicates that the
fan setting is On.
The number of
arrows indicates
fan speed
(3: high, 2:
medium, 1: low).
The example
shown indicates a
fan on high speed.
Not all systems
offer all three
speeds.

2. Press
or
to choose
the desired fan setting.

Indicates that the
fan setting is Off.

Indicates
that a
setting is
locked

3. When the symbol for the
desired setting appears,
confirm your choice by
• Pressing
(the
home screen will
appear), or
• Pressing
or
(the next menu
will appear), or
• Waiting five seconds.

Select to
request
occupancy

•

If you need heating or cooling after
normal business hours, you can
“request” temporary occupancy by
pressing
and holding it for
2 seconds. The occupied symbol
remains on the screen and the
unoccupied symbol disappears.
After 30 seconds, the unoccupied
symbol will re-appear.

•

To cancel temporary occupancy,
press
and hold for 2 seconds. The
unoccupied symbol will remain on
the screen and the occupied symbol
will disappear. After 30 seconds, the
occupied symbol will re-appear.

Indicates an
error code

If an error code (E0–E7) is displayed,
technical assistance may be required.

Select to
cancel
occupancy

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 85 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wireless Sensors

Wireless Sensor Specifications

Testing Signal Strength
Indicates
excellent
signal
strength

Indicates
satisfacto
ry signal
strength

Indicate
s poor
signal
strength

Press the Test button to display the signal strength
symbols.

Indicates
50% of
battery life
left.

Sensor operating temperature 32°F to 122°F
Receiver operating temperature -40°F to 158°F
Storage temperature

-40°F to 185°F

Storage and operating humidity 5% to 95%, non-condensing
range

Testing Battery Status
Indicates full
battery power

The following table presents specifications for all models
of the wireless sensor sets.

Indicates 25%
of battery life
left. Replace
batteries.
Flashing symbol
indicates that
approximately 14 days
of operation remain.

Press the Test button to display the battery status symbols.
Use only UL-listed non-rechargeable 1.5 V lithium AA
batteries (Trane p/n X13770035010 or equivalent).

Accuracy

0.5°F over a range of 55ºF to 85°F

Resolution

0.125°F over a range of 60°F to 80°F
0.25°F when outside this range

Setpoint functional range (WDS 50°F to 89.6°F
only)
Receiver voltage

24 V nominal ac/dc ±10%

Receiver power consumption

<1 VA

Housing

Polycarbonate/ABS blend, UV
protected, UL 94-5VA flammability
rating, suitable for application in a
plenum

Mounting

3.24 in (8.26 cm) for 2 mounting
screws (supplied)

Sensor battery

(2) AA, 1.5 V, 2800 mAh, lithium,
5-year life, UL listed

Range(a)

Open range: 2,500 ft (762 m)
(packet error rate = 2%)
Usable: 200 ft (61 m)
Typical: 75 ft (23 m)

Output power

100 mW

Radio frequency

2.4 GHz (IEEE Std 802.15.4-2003
compliant)
(2405 to 2480 MHz, 5 MHz spacing)

Radio channels

Address range

000 to 999

Minimum time between
transmissions

30 seconds

Maximum time between
transmissions

15 minutes

(a) Range values are estimated transmission distances for satisfactory operation. Actual distance is job specific and must be determined during
site evaluation.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 86 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wireless Sensors
The following table presents agency compliance
information for wireless sensor set models as shown.
United States compliance
(all models)

UL listed: UL 94-5VA Flammability rating
UL 916: Energy management equipment
FCC CFR47, Section 15.247 & Subpart E Digital Modulation Transmission with no SAR (FCC Identification TFP13651127)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Warning:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
20 cm separation distance:
To comply with FCC’s RF exposure limits for general population/uncontrolled exposure, the antenna(s) used
for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and
must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Canada compliance
(all models)

CSA22.2 No. 205-M1983 Signal Equipment

IEEE compliance for radio
frequency range
(all models)

IEEE 802.15.4-2003, IEEE Standard for Information Technology—Telecommunications and information
exchange between systems—Local and metropolitan area networks—Specific requirements, Part 15.4:
Wireless Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications for Low Rate Wireless
Personal Area Networks (LR-WPANs)

Industry Canada (Certification no: IC: 6178A-13651127)
Industry Canada statement:
the term “IC” before the certification/registration number signifies only that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Section 14 of RSS-210:
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does
not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 87 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Pre-Start
Pre-Startup Checklist

Unit Piping

Complete this checklist after installing the unit to verify all
recommended installation procedures are complete
before unit startup. This does not replace the detailed
instructions in the appropriate sections of this manual.
Disconnect electrical power before performing this
checklist. Always read the entire section carefully to
become familiar with the procedures.

1. Properly vent the hydronic coil to allow water flow
through the unit.

Receiving
 Inspect unit and components for shipping damage. File
damage claims immediately with the delivering carrier.

2. Units with deluxe piping package: Tighten unions
adequately.
3. Set water flow to the unit properly if unit piping has the
circuit setter valve.
4. Check strainers (if supplied) for debris after apply
system water.
5. Install the auxiliary drain pan and route the main drain
pan hoses to the auxiliary drain pan on vertical fan-coil
units.
6. Verify the condensate drain piping is complete for the
unit drain pan.
7.

Ensure the drain pan and condensate line are not
obstructed. Remove any foreign matter that may have
fallen into the drain pan during installation.

Electrical
 Check all electrical connections for tightness.
Note: Some circumstances may require the unit to run
before building construction is complete. These
operating conditions may be beyond the design
parameters of the unit and may adversely affect the
unit.

 Check unit for missing material. Look for ship-with
options and sensors that may be packaged separately
from the main unit (see “Receiving and Handling,”
p. 10).
 Check nameplate unit data so that it matches the sales
order requirements.

Unit Location
1. Ensure the unit location is adequate for unit
dimensions, ductwork, piping, and electrical
connections.
2. Ensure access and maintenance clearances around the
unit are adequate.

Unit Mounting
1. Ensure unit is installed level.

Component Overview
1. Ensure the fan rotates freely in the correct direction.
2. Ensure all unit access panels and air grilles are in place.
3. Verify that a clean air filter is in place.
4. Properly set the damper position to meet the fresh air
requirement.
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 88 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup
Tracer ZN510 and ZN520 Unit Startup
Refer to the Trane publication, CNT-IOP-1 (ComfortLink 10
Controller: Installation, Operation and Programming
Guide) for Tracer ZN510 and CNT-SVX04A-EN for Tracer
ZN520. The factory pre-programs the Tracer ZN510 and
ZN520 with default values to control the temperature and
unit airflow. Use Tracer Summit building automation
system or Rover™ software to change the default values.
Follow the procedure below to operate the Tracer ZN510 or
ZN520 in a stand-alone operation:
1. Turn power on at the disconnect switch option.
2. Position the fan mode switch to either high, medium,
low, or the auto position.

operation is requested and cold water (5° lower than
room temperature) flows into the unit.
3. Select the correct temperature setpoint.
Note: Select and enable zone sensor temperature
settings to prevent freeze damage to unit.

General Information
Manual Fan Speed Switch
The manual fan mode switch is available with a fourposition switch (off-hi-med-lo) allows manual fan mode
selection and is available unit- or wall-mounted. See
Figure 35.
Figure 35. Fan speed switch

3. Rotate the setpoint dial on the zone sensor module to
55°F for cooling or 85°F for heating.
The appropriate control valve will actuate assuming the
following conditions:
1. Room temperature should be greater than 55°F and
less than 85°F.
2. For a 2-pipe fan-coil unit with an automatic changeover
sensor, the water temperature input is appropriate for
the demand placed on the unit. For example, cooling
operation is requested and cold water (5° lower than
room temperature) flows into the unit.
3. Select the correct temperature setpoint.
Note: Select and enable zone sensor temperature
settings to prevent freeze damage to unit.

Tracer UC400 Unit Startup
Refer to the Trane publication, Installation, Operation, and
Programming Guide for Factory or Field-installed Blower
Coil and Fan Coil (BAS-SVX48A-EN, or the most recent
revision) for Tracer UC400 Fan Coil. The factory preprograms the Tracer UC400 Fan Coil with default values to
control the temperature and unit airflow. Use Tracer SC
building automation system or Tracer TU™ software to
change the default values.
Follow the procedure below to operate the Tracer UC400 in
a stand-alone operation:

The fan speed switch can be used to provide simultaneous
fan speed customer requests in addition to external
controller fan speed request. The wall-mounted option is
low-voltage and has three 24-volt relays using a factorywired transformer and relays to control the fan motor.

Tracer ZN010 and ZN510
Tracer ZN010 is a stand-alone device that controls fan-coils
and cabinet heaters. Tracer ZN510 can be stand-alone or
use peer-to-peer communications.
The controller is easily accessible in the control end panel
for service. The control end panel is on the end of the unit
opposite the piping. See Figure 36.
Figure 36. Tracer ZN010 board

1. Turn power on at the disconnect switch option.
2. Position the fan mode switch to either high, medium,
low, or the auto position.
3. Rotate the setpoint dial on the zone sensor module to
55°F for cooling or 85°F for heating.
The appropriate control valve will actuate assuming the
following conditions:
1. Room temperature should be greater than 55°F and
less than 85°F.
2. For a 2-pipe fan-coil unit with an automatic changeover
sensor, the water temperature input is appropriate for
the demand placed on the unit. For example, cooling
88

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 89 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup

Fan Mode Switch Operation

UC400 Controller Operation

Off

Fan is turned off, two-position damper option springreturns closed.

Fan is off; control valve options and fresh air damper
options close. The low air temperature detection option is
still active.

Hi, Med, Lo
Fan runs continuously at the selected speed. The twoposition damper option opens to an adjustable
mechanical stop position.

Tracer ZN010 & ZN510 Operation
Off
Fan is off; control valves and fresh air damper option close.
Low air temperature detection option is still active.

Auto (Fan Cycling)
Fan and fresh air damper cycle with control valve option to
maintain setpoint temperature. In cooling mode, the fan
cycles from off to medium and in heating mode it cycles
from off to low. When no heating or cooling is required, the
fan is off and the fresh air damper option closes.

Low/Med/High (Continuous Fan)
Fan operates continuously while control valve option
cycles to maintain setpoint temperature. Fresh air damper
option is open.

Auto
Fan speed control in the auto setting allows the
modulating (3-wire floating point) or 2-position control
valve option and 1-, 2-, 3- or variable-speed fan to work
cooperatively to meet precise capacity requirement, while
minimizing fan speed (motor/energy/acoustics) and valve
position (pump energy, chilled water reset). As the
capacity requirement increases, the water valve opens.
When the fan speed capacity switch points are reached,
the fan speed ramps up and the water valve repositions to
maintain an equivalent capacity. The reverse sequence
takes place with a decrease in required capacity.

Low/Med/High
The fan runs continuously at the selected speed and the
valve option will cycle to meet setpoint.

Sequence of Operation: Tracer
ZN010 and ZN510

Tracer ZN520 Operation

Note: This section applies only to units with a Tracer
ZN010 or ZN510 controller.

Off

Power-Up Sequence (Tracer ZN010 and ZN510)

Fan is off; control valve options and fresh air damper
options close. The low air temperature detection option is
still active.

When 24 Vac power is initially applied to the Tracer ZN010
or ZN510, the following sequence occurs:

Auto

2. Tracer ZN010 and ZN510 reads all input values to
determine initial values.

Fan speed control in the auto setting allows the
modulating (3-wire floating point) or 2–position control
valve option and three-speed fan to work cooperatively to
meet precise capacity requirement, while minimizing fan
speed (motor/energy/acoustics ) and valve position (pump
energy, chilled water reset ). As the capacity requirement
increases at low fan speed, the water valve opens. When
the low fan speed capacity switch point is reached, the fan
switches to medium speed and the water valve repositions
to maintain an equivalent capacity. The reverse sequence
takes place with a decrease in required capacity.

Low/Med/High
The fan runs continuously at the selected speed and the
valve option will cycle to meet setpoint.

1. All outputs are controlled off.

3. The random start time (0-25 seconds) expires.
4. Normal operation begins.

Entering Water Temperature Sampling
Function (Tracer ZN010 and ZN510)
Both Tracer ZN010 and ZN510 use an entering water
temperature sampling function to test for the correct water
temperature for the unit operating mode. For all
applications not involving changeover, the water
temperature does not affect unit operation.
The entering water temperature sampling function opens
the main hydronic valve, waits no more than three minutes
to allow the water temperature to stabilize, then measures
the entering water temperature to see if the correct water
temperature is available.
The entering water must be five degrees or more above
the space temperature to allow hydronic heating and five
degrees or more below the space temperature to allow
hydronic cooling.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 90 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup
If the correct water temperature is available, the unit
begins normal heating or cooling operation. If the
measured entering water temperature is too low or high,
the controller closes the valve and waits 60 minutes before
attempting to sample the entering water. Refer to Table 19.
Table 19. Unit mode as related to water temperature

Unit Type

EWT
Sensor
Required? Coil Water Temperature

2-pipe changeover

Yes

COOLS if: Space temp - EWT ≥ 5°F
HEATS if: EWT - space temp ≥ 5°F

4-pipe changeover

Yes

COOLS if: Space temp - EWT ≥ 5°F
HEATS if: EWT - space temp≥ 5°F

Table 20. Occupancy sensor state table
Sensor Type

Sensor Position

Unit Occupancy Mode

Normally open

Open

Occupied

Normally open

Closed

Unoccupied

Normally closed

Open

Unoccupied

Normally closed

Closed

Occupied

Binary Outputs (Tracer ZN010 and ZN510)
Refer to Table 21 for the six binary outputs of Tracer ZN010
and ZN510.
Table 21. Binary outputs

2-pipe heating only No

Hot water assumed

Binary output

Description

2-pipe cooling only

Cold water assumed

BOP1

Fan high speed

J1-1

4 pipe (2 pipe heat
and 2 pipe cool)

Cold water assumed in main coil

BOP2

Fan medium speed

J1-2

Hot water assumed in aux. coil

BOP3

Fan low speed

J1-4

BOP4

Main valve

J1-5

BOP5

Auxiliary valve/electric heat

J1-6

BOP6

2-position fresh air damper

J1-7

Binary Inputs (Tracer ZN010 and ZN510)
BIP1: Low Temperature Detection Option
(Tracer ZN010 and ZN510)
The factory hard wires the low temperature detection
sensor to binary input #1 (BIP1) on the Tracer ZN010 and
ZN510. The sensor defaults normally closed (N.C.), and
will trip off the unit on a low temperature diagnostic when
detecting low temperature. In addition, the Tracer ZN010
and ZN510 control unit devices as listed below:

Notes:
1. In a four-pipe application, BOP4 is used for cooling and BOP5 is used
for heating.
2. If no valves are ordered with the unit, the factory defaults for the
Tracer ZN010 and ZN510 controller are:
BOP4 configured as normally closed
BOP5 configured as normally open
3. If the fresh air damper option is not ordered on the unit, BOP6 will be
configured as none.

Fan: Off

Both Tracer ZN010 and ZN510 accept a maximum of five
analog inputs. Refer to Table 22, p. 90.

Valves: Open

Table 22. Analog inputs

Electric heat: Off
Damper: Closed
Note: See “Diagnostics,” p. 112 for more information.

BIP2: Condensate Overflow Detection Option
(Tracer ZN010 and ZN510)
The factory hard wires the condensate overflow sensor to
binary input #2 (BIP2) on the Tracer ZN010 and ZN510. The
sensor defaults normally closed (N.C.), and will trip off the
unit on a condensate overflow diagnostic if condensate
reaches the trip point. In addition, the Tracer ZN010 and
ZN510 control unit devices as listed below:
Fan: Off
Valves: Closed
Electric heat: Off

Analog Input

Description

Application

Space temperature

Space temperature detection /
timed override detection

Set

Local setpoint

Thumbwheel setpoint

Fan

Fan mode input

Zone sensor fan switch

Analog input 1
(AI1)

Entering water
temperature

Entering water temperature
detection

Analog input 2
(AI2)

Discharge air
temperature

Discharge air temperature
detection

Zone

Notes:
1. 1.The zone sensor, entering water temperature sensor, and the
discharge air temperature sensor are 10 KΩ thermistors. Figure 43,
p. 117 provides the resistance-temperature curve for these
thermistors.
2. Zone sensor:
Wall-mounted sensors include a thermistor soldered to the sensor’s circuit board
Unit mounted sensors include a return air sensor in the unit’s return
air stream.
3. Changeover units include an entering water temperature sensor.

BIP3: Occupancy Sensor (Tracer ZN010 and
ZN510)
Binary input #3 (BIP3) on Tracer ZN010 and ZN510 is
available for field-wiring an occupancy sensor, such as a
binary switch or a timeclock, to detect occupancy. The
sensor can be either normally open or normally closed.
Refer to Table 20.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 91 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup
Zone Sensors (Tracer ZN010 and ZN510)
The zone sensors available with the Tracer ZN010 and
ZN510 provide up to three different inputs

Table 24. Valid operating range and factory default
setpoints
Setpoint/parameter

Default Setting Valid Operating Range

1. Space temperature measurement (10 KΩ thermistor)

Unoccupied cooling setpoint 85°F

40°F to 115°F

2. Local setpoint

Occupied cooling setpoint

74°F

40°F to 115°F

Occupied heating setpoint

71°F

40°F to 115°F

Unoccupied heating
setpoint

60°F

40°F to 115°F

Cooling setpoint high limit

110°F

40°F to 115°F

Cooling setpoint low limit

40°F

40°F to 115°F

3. Fan mode switch
Wall-mounted zone sensors include a thermistor as a
component of the internal printed circuit board. Unit
mounted zone sensors use a sensor placed in the unit’s
return air stream.
Each zone sensor is equipped with a thumb wheel for
setpoint adjustment.

Heating setpoint high limit 105°F

40°F to 115°F

Heating setpoint low limit

40°F

40°F to 115°F

Power-up control wait

0 sec

0 sec to 240 sec

Fan Mode Switch (Tracer ZN010 and ZN510)
The zone sensor may be equipped with a fan mode switch.
The fan mode switch offers selections of off, low, medium,
high, or auto.

Supply Fan Operation (Tracer ZN010 and
ZN510)
Refer to Table 23 for fan mode operation. Tracer ZN010 and
ZN510 will operate in either continuous fan or fan cycling
mode. The fan cycles when the fan mode switch is placed
in auto. The fan runs continuous when placed in the high,
medium, or low position. Use Rover, Trane’s installation
and service tool, to change auto defaults.
Table 23. Fan mode operation
Heating Mode

Cooling Mode

Fan mode

Occupied

Unoccupied

Occupied

Unoccupied

Off

Low

Off/high(a)

Low

Off/high(a)

Medium

Off/high(a)

Medium

Off/high(a)

High

Off/high(a)

High

Off/high(a)

Cool default

Off/high(a)

Off/cool
default

Off/high(a)

Auto
Continuous

Heat default Off/high(a)

Cycling off/heat default

Off/high(a)

Notes:
1. During the transition from off to any fan speed but high, Tracer ZN010
and ZN510 automatically starts the fan on high speed and runs for
three seconds before transitioning to the selected speed (if it is other
than high). This provides enough torque to start all fan motors from
the off position.
2. When the heating output is controlled off, Tracer ZN010 and ZN510
automatically controls the fan on for an additional 30 seconds. This
delay allows the fan to dissipate any residual heat from the heating
source, such as electric heat.
(a) Whenever two states are listed for the fan:
The first state (off) applies when there is not a call for heating or cooling.
The second state (varies) applies when there is a call for heating or cooling.
The heat default is factory configured for low fan speed, and the cool
default is medium.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 92 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup

Tracer ZN520 Sequence of
Operation
The Tracer ZN520 operates the fan in the following modes:
1. occupied
2. unoccupied
3. occupied standby
4. occupied bypass
5. Tracer Summit with supply fan control

Occupied (Tracer ZN520)
When the controller is in the occupied mode, the unit
attempts to maintain the space temperature at the active
occupied heating or cooling setpoint, based on the
measured space temperature, the discharge air
temperature, the active setpoint, and the proportional/
integral control algorithm. The modulating control
algorithm used when occupied or in occupied standby is
described in the following sections. Additional
information related to the handling of the controller
setpoints can be found in the previous Setpoint operation
section.

Unoccupied Mode (Tracer ZN520)
When the controller is in the unoccupied mode, the
controller attempts to maintain the space temperature at
the stored unoccupied heating or cooling setpoint, based
on the measured space temperature, the active setpoint
and the control algorithm, regardless of the presence of a
hard-wired or communicated setpoint. Similar to other
configuration properties of the controller, the locally
stored unoccupied setpoints can be modified using Rover
service tool.
In unoccupied mode, a simplified zone control algorithm is
run. During the cooling mode, when the space
temperature is above the cool setpoint, the primary
cooling capacity operates at 100 percent. If more capacity
is needed, the supplementary cooling capacity turns on (or
opens to 100 percent). During the heating mode, when the
space temperature is below the heat setpoint, the primary
heating capacity turns on. All capacity is turned off when
the space temperature is between the unoccupied cooling
and heating setpoints. Note that primary heating or
cooling capacity is defined by unit type and whether
heating or cooling is enabled or disabled. For example, if
the economizer is enabled and possible, it will be the
primary cooling capacity. If hydronic heating is possible, it
will be the primary heating capacity.

Occupied Standby Mode (Tracer ZN520)
The controller can be placed into the occupied standby
mode when a communicated occupancy request is
combined with the local (hard-wired) occupancy binary
input signal. When the communicated occupancy request
is unoccupied, the occupancy binary input (if present)
92

does not affect the controller’s occupancy. When the
communicated occupancy request is occupied, the
controller uses the local occupancy binary input to switch
between the occupied and occupied standby modes.
During occupied standby mode, the controller’s
economizer damper position goes to the economizer
standby minimum position. The economizer standby
minimum position can be changed using Rover service
tool.
In the occupied standby mode, the controller uses the
occupied standby cooling and heating setpoints. Because
the occupied standby setpoints typically cover a wider
range than the occupied setpoints, the Tracer ZN520
controller reduces the demand for heating and cooling the
space. Also, the outdoor air economizer damper uses the
economizer standby minimum position to reduce the
heating and cooling demands.
When no occupancy request is communicated, the
occupancy binary input switches the controller’s operating
mode between occupied and unoccupied. When no
communicated occupancy request exists, the unit cannot
switch to occupied standby mode.

Occupied Bypass Mode (Tracer ZN520)
The controller can be placed in occupied bypass mode by
either communicating an occupancy request of Bypass to
the controller or by using the timed override On button on
the Trane zone sensor.
When the controller is in unoccupied mode, you can press
the On button on the zone sensor to place the controller
into occupied bypass mode for the duration of the bypass
time (typically 120 minutes).

Occupancy Sources (Tracer ZN520)
There are four ways to control the controller’s occupancy:
•

Communicated request (usually provided by the
building automation system or peer device)

•

By pressing the zone sensor’s timed override On
button

•

Occupancy binary input

•

Default operation of the controller (occupied mode)

A communicated request from a building automation
system or another peer controller can change the
controller’s occupancy. However, if communication is lost,
the controller reverts to the default operating mode
(occupied) after 15 minutes (configurable, specified by the
“receive heartbeat time”), if no local hard-wired
occupancy signal exists.
A communicated request can be provided to control the
occupancy of the controller. Typically, the occupancy of
the controller is determined by using time-of-day
scheduling of the building automation system. The result
of the time-of-day schedule can then be communicated to
the unit controller.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 93 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup
Tracer Summit with Supply Fan Control
(Tracer ZN520)

The controller only cycles the fan off with heating and
cooling capacity in the unoccupied mode.

If the unit is communicating with Tracer Summit and the
supply fan control programming point is configured for
Tracer (the factory configures as local), Tracer Summit will
control the fan regardless of the fan mode switch position.

The economizer is used for cooling purposes whenever
the outdoor temperature is below the economizer enable
setpoint and there is a need for cooling. The economizer is
used first to meet the space demand, and other forms of
cooling are used if the economizer cannot meet the
demand alone. See modulating outdoor air damper
operation for additional information.

When the fan mode switch is set to Off or when power is
restored to the unit, all Tracer ZN520 lockouts (latching
diagnostics) are manually reset. The last diagnostic to
occur is retained until the unit power is disconnected.
Refer to Trane publication, CNT-SVX04A-EN (Tracer
ZN.520 Unit Controller: Installation, Operation and
Programming Guide) for specific instructions regarding
the procedure for running the Tracer ZN520.

Cooling Operation (Tracer ZN520)
The heating and cooling setpoint high and low limits are
always applied to the occupied and occupied standby
setpoints. During the cooling mode, the Tracer ZN520
controller attempts to maintain the space temperature at
the active cooling setpoint. Based on the controller’s
occupancy mode, the active cooling setpoint is one of the
following:
•

Occupied cooling setpoint

•

Occupied standby cooling setpoint

•

Unoccupied cooling setpoint

The controller uses the measured space temperature, the
active cooling setpoint, and discharge air temperature
along with the control algorithm to determine the
requested cooling capacity of the unit (0 percent–
100 percent). The outputs are controlled based on the unit
configuration and the required cooling capacity. To
maintain space temperature control, the Tracer ZN520
cooling outputs (modulating hydronic valve, two-position
hydronic valve, or outdoor air economizer damper) are
controlled based on the cooling capacity output.
The cooling output is controlled based on the cooling
capacity. At 0 percent capacity, all cooling capacities are
off and the damper is at minimum position. Between
0 percent and 100 percent capacity, the cooling outputs
are controlled according to modulating valve logic
(modulating valves) or cycled on (2-position valves). As
the load increases, modulating outputs open further and
binary outputs are energized longer. At 100 percent
capacity, the cooling valve or damper is fully open
(modulating valves) or on continuously (and 2-position
valves).
Unit diagnostics can affect fan operation, causing
occupied and occupied standby fan operation to be
defined as abnormal. Refer to “Troubleshooting (Wireless
Controls),” p. 117 for more information about abnormal
fan operation.
The Tracer ZN520 controller operates the supply fan
continuously when the controller is in the occupied and
occupied standby modes, for either heating or cooling.
UNT-SVX07D-EN

Cascade cooling control initiates a discharge air tempering
function if the discharge air temperature falls below the
discharge air temperature control low limit, all cooling
capacity is at minimum, and the discharge control loop
determines a need to raise the discharge air temperature.
The controller then provides heating capacity to raise the
discharge air temperature to its low limit.

Discharge Air Tempering (Tracer ZN520)
The discharge air tempering function enables when cold
outdoor air is brought in through the outdoor air damper,
causing the discharge air to fall below the discharge air
temperature control low limit. The controller exits the
discharge air tempering function when heat capacity has
been at 0 percent for five minutes.

Heating Operation (Tracer ZN520)
During heating mode, the Tracer ZN520 controller
attempts to maintain the space temperature at the active
heating setpoint. Based on the occupancy mode of the
controller, the active heating setpoint is one of the
following:
•

Occupied heating

•

Occupied standby heating

•

Unoccupied heating

During dehumidification in the heating mode, the
controller adjusts the heating setpoint up to the cooling
setpoint. This reduces the relative humidity in the space
with a minimum of energy usage.
The controller uses the measured space temperature, the
active heating setpoint, and discharge air temperature,
along with the control algorithm, to determine the
requested heating capacity of the unit (0 percent–
100 percent). The outputs are controlled based on the unit
configuration and the required heating capacity.
Unit diagnostics can affect the Tracer ZN520 controller
operation, causing unit operation to be defined as
abnormal. Refer to the Troubleshooting section for more
information about abnormal unit operation.
The heating output is controlled based on the heating
capacity. At 0 percent capacity, the heating output is off
continuously. Between 0 percent and 100 percent
capacity, the heating output is controlled according to
modulating valve logic (modulating valves) or cycled on
(two-position valves). As the load increases, modulating
outputs open further and binary outputs are energized
93

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 94 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup
longer. At 100 percent capacity, the heating valve is fully
open (modulating valves) or on continuously (twoposition valves).

controller. When both are present, the communicated
request has priority over the hard-wired input. See
Table 26, Table 27, and Table 28.

The Tracer ZN520 fan output(s) normally run continuously
during the occupied and occupied standby modes, but
cycle between high and off speeds with heating/cooling
during the unoccupied mode. When in the occupied mode
or occupied standby mode and the fan speed is set at the
high, medium, or low position, the fan runs continuously
at the selected speed. Refer to the Troubleshooting section
for more information on abnormal fan operation.

Table 26. Local fan switch enabled (Tracer ZN520)

When the unit’s supply fan is set to auto, the controller’s
configuration determines the fan speed when in the
occupied mode or occupied standby mode. The fan runs
continuously at the configured heating fan speed or
cooling fan speed. For all fan speed selections except off,
the fan cycles off during unoccupied mode.
The economizer outdoor air damper is never used as a
source of heating. Instead, the economizer damper (when
present) is only used for ventilation; therefore, the damper
is at the occupied minimum position in the occupied
mode. The damper control is primarily associated with
occupied fan operation.

Fan Mode Operation (Tracer ZN520)
For multiple fan speed applications, the Tracer ZN520
controller offers additional fan configuration flexibility.
Separate default fan speeds for heating and cooling
modes can be configured. The fan runs continuously for
requested speeds (off, high, medium, or low). When the
fan mode switch is in the Auto position or a hard-wired fan
mode input does not exist, the fan operates at the default
configured speed. See Table 25, p. 94 for default fan
configuration for heat and cool mode. During unoccupied
mode, the fan cycles between high speed and off with
heating and cooling fan modes. If the requested speed is
off, the fan always remains off.
Table 25. Fan configuration (Tracer ZN520)
Heating

Auto Fan Operation

Fan Speed Default

Continuous

Off
Low
Medium
High

Cooling

Continuous

Off
Low
Medium
High

Communicated Fan Speed
Input

Fan Switch
(Local)

Fan
Operation
Off

Off

Ignored

Low

Ignored

Low

Medium

Ignored

Medium

High

Ignored

High

Auto

Off

Low
Medium
High
Auto

Off

Low
Medium
High
Auto (configured default, determined by heat/cool mode)

Table 27.

Fan operation in heating and cooling modes
(Tracer ZN520)
Heating

Cooling

Fan Mode

Occ.

Unocc.

Occ.

Off

Unocc.
Off

Low

Off/high

Low

Off/high

Medium

Med

Off/high

Med

Off/high

High

Off/high

High

Off/high

Auto

Default fan sp.

Off/high

Default fan sp.

Off/high

Table 28. Local fan switch disabled or not present (Tracer
ZN520)
Communicated Fan Speed Input Fan Operation
Off

Off

Low

Medium

High

Auto (or not present)

Auto (fan runs at the default speed)

Continuous Fan Operation (Tracer ZN520)
During occupied and occupied standby modes, the fan
normally is on. For multiple speed fan applications, the fan
normally operates at the selected or default speed (off,
high, medium, or low). When fan mode is auto, the fan
operates at the default fan speed.

During dehumidification, when the fan is on Auto, the fan
speed can switch depending on the error. Fan speed
increases as the space temperature rises above the active
cooling setpoint.

During unoccupied mode, the controller controls the fan
off. While unoccupied, the controller heats and cools to
maintain the unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints. In
unoccupied mode, the fan is controlled on high speed only
with heating or cooling.

Additional flexibility built into the controller allows you to
enable or disable the local fan switch input. The fan mode
request can be either hard-wired or communicated to the

The unit fan is always off during occupied, occupied
standby, and unoccupied modes when the unit is off due
to a diagnostic or when the unit is in the off mode due to

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 95 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup
the local zone sensor module, a communicated request, or
the default fan speed (off).
If both a zone sensor module and communicated request
exist, the communicated request has priority.

Fan Cycling Operation (Tracer ZN520)
Tracer ZN520 does not support fan cycling in
occupied mode. The fan cycles between high speed and
off in the unoccupied mode only. The controller’s cascade
control algorithm requires continuous fan operation in the
occupied mode.

Fan Off Delay (Tracer ZN520)
When a heating output is controlled off, the Tracer ZN520
controller automatically holds the fan on for an additional
30 seconds. This 30-second delay gives the fan time to
blow off any residual heat from the heating source, such as
a steam coil. When the unit is heating, the fan off delay is
normally applied to control the fan; otherwise, the fan off
delay does not apply.

Fan Start on High Speed (Tracer ZN520)
On a transition from off to any other fan speed, the Tracer
ZN520 controller automatically starts the fan on high
speed and runs the fan at high speed for 0.5 seconds. This
provides the ample torque required to start all fan motors
from the off position.

Entering Water Temperature Sampling
Function (Tracer ZN520)
Only units using the main hydronic coil for both heating
and cooling (2-pipe changeover and 4-pipe changeover
units) use the entering water temperature sampling
function. Two-pipe changeover and 4-pipe changeover
applications allow the main coil to be used for heating and
for cooling; therefore, these applications require an
entering water temperature sensor.
When three-way valves are ordered with a Tracer ZN520
control, the controller is factory-configured to disable the
entering water temperature sampling function, and the
entering water sensor is mounted in the proper location.
Disabling entering water temperature sampling
eliminates unnecessary water flow through the main coil
when three-way valves are used.
The controller invokes entering water temperature
sampling only when the measured entering water
temperature is too cool to heat or too warm to cool.
Entering water is cold enough to cool when it is five
degrees below the measured space temperature. Entering
water is warm enough to heat when it is five degrees
above the measured space temperature.
When the controller invokes the entering water
temperature sampling function, the unit opens the main
hydronic valve for no more than three minutes before
considering the measured entering water temperature. An
initial stabilization period is allowed to flush the coil. This
period is equal to 30 seconds plus half of the valve stroke
UNT-SVX07D-EN

time. Once this temperature stabilization period has
expired, the controller compares the entering water
temperature against the effective space temperature
(either hard-wired or communicated) to determine
whether the entering water can be used for the desired
heating or cooling. If the water temperature is not usable
for the desired mode, the controller continues to compare
the entering water temperature against the effective space
temperature for a maximum of three minutes.
The controller automatically disables the entering water
temperature sampling and closes the main hydronic valve
when the measured entering water exceeds the high
entering water temperature limit (110°F). When the
entering water temperature is warmer than 110°F, the
controller assumes the entering water temperature is hot
because it is unlikely the coil would drift to a high
temperature unless the actual loop temperature was very
high.
If the entering water temperature is unusable—too cool to
heat or too warm to cool—the controller closes the
hydronic valve and waits 60 minutes before initializing
another sampling. If the controller determines the
entering water temperature is valid for heating or cooling,
it resumes normal heating/cooling control and effectively
disables entering water temperature sampling until it is
required.

Electric Heat Operation (Tracer ZN520)
The Tracer ZN520 controller supports one or two-stage
electric heat operation for heating. To control the space
temperature, electric heat is cycled to control the
discharge air temperature. The rate of cycling is
dependent upon the load in the space and the temperature
of the incoming fresh air from the economizer (if any).
Two-pipe changeover units with electric heat use the
electric heat only when hot water is not available.

Manual Fresh Air Damper (Tracer ZN520)
Units with the manual fresh air damper option ship with
the damper in the closed position, which is adjustable
from zero to 100 percent in 25 percent increments. To
adjust the position, first remove the air filter to expose the
damper stop screw on the control panel end. Relocate the
stop screw to the appropriate position. Then loosen the
stop screw wingnut and adjust the linkage.

Economizer Damper Option (Tracer ZN520)
With a valid outdoor air temperature (either hard-wired or
communicated), Tracer ZN520 uses the modulating
economizer damper as the highest priority source of
cooling. Economizer operation is only possible through
the use of a modulating damper.
Economizing is possible during the occupied, occupied
standby, unoccupied, and occupied bypass modes.
The controller initiates the economizer function if the
outdoor air temperature is cold enough to be used as free
cooling capacity. If the outdoor air temperature is less than
95

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 96 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup
the economizer enable setpoint (absolute dry bulb), the
controller modulates the outdoor air damper (between the
active minimum damper position and 100 percent) to
control the amount of outdoor air cooling capacity. When
the outdoor air temperature rises 5°F above the
economizer enable point, the controller disables
economizing and moves the outdoor air damper back to its
predetermined minimum position based on the current
occupancy mode or communicated minimum damper
position.

without the existence of a building automation system.
This applies to applications where multiple unit
controllers share a single space temperature sensor (for
rooms with multiple units but only one zone sensor) for
both standalone (with communication wiring between
units) and building automation system applications. For
this application you will need to use the Rover service tool.
For more information on setup, refer to the Trane
publication EMTX-SVX01G-EN, or the most recent
version.

Table 29. Relationship between outdoor temperature
sensors and damper position (Tracer ZN520)

Binary Inputs (Tracer ZN520)

Outdoor Air
Temp.
Modulating Outdoor Air Damper
Occupied or
Occupied
Bypass
Occupied Standby

Unoccupied

None or invalid Open to
occupied
minimum
position

Open to occupied
standby minimum
position

Closed

Failed

Open to
occupied
minimum
position

Open to occupied
standby minimum
position

Closed

Present and
economizing
feasible

Economizing
minimum
postion to
100%

Economizing between
occupied standby
minimum position to
100%

Open &
economizing
when unit is
operating, closed

Present &
economizing
not feasible

Open to
occupied
minimum
position

Open to occupied
standby minimum
position

Closed

Dehumidification (Tracer ZN520)
Dehumidification is possible when mechanical cooling is
available, the heating capacity is located in the reheat
position, and the space relative humidity setpoint is
valid.The controller starts dehumidifying the space when
the space humidity exceeds the humidity setpoint.
The controller continues to dehumidify until the sensed
humidity falls below the setpoint minus the relative
humidity offset.The controller uses the cooling and reheat
capacities simultaneously to dehumidify the space. While
dehumidifying, the discharge air temperature is controlled
to maintain the space temperature at the current setpoint.
A typical scenario involves high humidity and high
temperature load of the space.The controller sets the
cooling capacity to 100 percent and uses the reheat
capacity to warm the discharge air to maintain space
temperature control. Dehumidification may be disabled
via Tracer or configuration.
Note: If the unit is in the unoccupied mode, the
dehumidification routine will not operate.

Data Sharing (Tracer ZN520)
Because this controller utilizes LONWORKS® technology, the
controller can send or receive data (setpoint, heat/cool
mode, fan request, space temperature, etc.) to and from
other controllers on the communication link, with or
96

The Tracer ZN520 controller has four available binary
inputs (see Table 30). Normally, these inputs are factoryconfigured for the following functions:
•

Binary input 1: Low temperature detection (freezestat)

•

Binary input 2: Condensate overflow

•

Binary input 3: Occupancy/ Generic

•

Binary input 4: Fan status

Note: The generic binary input can be used with a Tracer
Summit™ building automation system only.
Each binary input default configuration (including
normally open/closed) is set at the factory. However, you
can configure each of the four binary inputs as normally
open or normally closed. The controller will be set
properly for each factory-supplied binary input enddevice. When no device is connected to the input,
configure the controller’s input as not used.
Table 30. Binary input configurations (Tracer ZN520)
Controller Operation
Binary
Input

Description

Contact
Configuration Closed

Contact
Open

BI 1

Low temperature
Normally closed Normal
detection(a)

Diagnostic(b)

BI 2

Condensate
overflow(a)

Normally closed Normal

Diagnostic(b)

BI 3

Occupancy

Normally open

Unoccupied Occupied

BI 3

Generic binary
input

Normally open

Normal(c)

BI 4

Fan status(a)

Normally open

Normal

Diagnostic(d)

Note: The occupancy binary input is for standalone unit controllers as an
occupied/unoccupied input. However, when the controller receives
a communicated occupied/unoccupied request, the communicated
request has priority over the hard-wired input.
(a) During low temperature, condensate overflow, and fan status diagnostics, the Tracer ZN520 control disables all normal unit operation of the
fan, valves, and damper.
(b) Table 31, p. 97 shows the controller’s response to low temperature detection, condensate overflow, and fan status diagnostics.
(c) The generic binary input does not affect unit operation. A building automation system reads this input as a generic binary input.
(d) If the fan mode input is in the off position or the controller is in the unoccupied mode with the fan off, the fan status input will be open. A diagnostic will not be generated when the controller commands the fan
off. A diagnostic will only be generated if the fan status input does not
close after one minute from energizing a fan output or any time the input
is open for one minute. The controller waits up to one minute after energizing a fan output to allow the differential pressure to build up across
the fan.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 97 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup
Binary Outputs (Tracer ZN520)
Binary outputs are configured to support the following:
•

Three fan stages (when one or two fan stages are
present, medium fan speed can be configured as
exhaust fan)

•

One hydronic cooling stage

•

One hydronic heating stage (dehumidification requires
this to be in the reheat position)

Table 32. Analog inputs (Tracer ZN520)
Descripti Termina
on
ls
Function

Range

Zone

Space temperature
input

5°F to 122°F

TB3-1

Ground

TB3-2

Analog ground

Set

TB3-3

Setpoint input

40°F to 115°F

Fan

B3-4

Fan switch input

4821 to 4919 W (off)
2297 to 2342 W (auto)
10593 to 10807 W (low)

•

One DX cooling stage

•

One or two-stage electric heat (dehumidification
requires this to be in the reheat position)

•

Face and bypass damper

Ground

TB3-6

Analog ground

•

Modulating outdoor air damper

Analog
input 1

J3-1

Entering water
temperature

-40°F to 212°F

•

One baseboard heat stage

J3-2

Analog ground

J3-3

Discharge air
temperature

-40°F to 212°F

J3-4

Analog ground

J3-5

Fresh air temp/generic -40°F to 212°F
temp

For more information, see Table 31, p. 97.

13177 to 13443 W
(medium)
15137 to 16463 W (high)

Analog
input 2

Table 31. Binary output configuration (Tracer ZN520)
Analog
input 3

Binary
Output

Configuration

J1-1

Fan high

J1-2

Fan medium

Analog
input 4

J3-6

Analog ground

J3-7

Universal input

0% to 100%

J1-3

Fan low

Generic 4–20mA

0% to 100%

J1-4

(Key)

Humidity

0 to 2000 ppm

J1-5

Cool valve—open, or 2-position valve(a)

J1-6

Cool valve—close Note 1

J1-9

Heat valve—open, or 2 position valve, or 1st electric heat
stage(a)

J1-10

Heat valve—close or 2nd Electric heat stage(a)

J1-11

Fresh air damper—open

J1-12

Fresh air damper—close

TB4-1

Generic/baseboard heat output

TB4-2

24 Vac

(a) For Tracer ZN520 units configured and applied as 2-pipe hydronic heat/
cool changeover, terminals J1-5 and J1-6 are used to control the primary valve for both heating and cooling. For Tracer ZN520 units configured and applied as 2-pipe hydronic heat/cool changeover with
electric heat, terminals J1-5 and J1-6 are used to control the primary
valve (for both cooling and heating), and terminals J1-9 and J1-10 are
used only for the electric heat stage. For those 2-pipe changeover units,
electric heat will not be energized while the hydronic supply is hot (5°
or more above the space temperature).

CO2
Ground

J3-8

Analog ground

J3-9

Analog ground

Notes:
1. The zone sensor, entering water temperature sensor, discharge air
sensor, and the outside air temperature sensor are 10KΩ thermistors.
2. Zone sensor: Wall-mounted sensors include a thermistor soldered to
the sensor’s circuit board. Unit mounted sensors include a return air
sensor in the units return air stream.
3. Changeover units include an entering water temperature sensor.

Zone Sensor (Tracer ZN520)
The Tracer ZN520 controller accepts the following zone
sensor module inputs:
•

Space temperature measurement (10kΩ thermistor)

•

Local setpoint (either internal or external on the zone
sensor module)

•

Fan switch

•

Timed override (On) and Cancel timed override

•

Communication jack

Space Temperature Measurement (Tracer
ZN520)
Trane zone sensors use a 10kΩ thermistor to measure the
space temperature. Typically, zone sensors are wallmounted in the room and include a space temperature
thermistor. As an option, the zone sensor can be unitmounted with a separate space temperature thermistor
located in the unit’s return air stream. If both a hard-wired
and communicated space temperature value exist, the
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 98 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup
controller ignores the hard-wired space temperature input
and uses the communicated value.

External Setpoint Adjustment (Tracer ZN520)
Zone sensors with an external setpoint adjustment (1kΩ)
provide the Tracer ZN520 controller with a local setpoint
(50°F to 85°F or 10°C to 29.4°C). The external setpoint is
exposed on the zone sensor’s front cover.
When the hard-wired setpoint adjustment is used to
determine the setpoints, all unit setpoints are calculated
based on the hard-wired setpoint value, the configured
setpoints, and the active mode of the controller. The hardwired setpoint is used with the controller’s occupancy
mode (occupied, occupied standby, or unoccupied), the
heating or cooling mode, the temperature deadband
values, and the heating and cooling setpoints (high and
low limits) to determine the controller’s active setpoint.
When a building automation system or other controller
communicates a setpoint to the controller, the controller
ignores the hard-wired setpoint input and uses the
communicated value. The exception is the unoccupied
mode, when the controller always uses the stored default
unoccupied setpoints. After the controller completes all
setpoint calculations, based on the requested setpoint, the
occupancy mode, the heating and cooling mode, and
other factors, the calculated setpoint is validated against
the following setpoint limits:
•

Heating setpoint high limit

•

Heating setpoint low limit

•

Cooling setpoint high limit

•

Cooling setpoint low limit

These setpoint limits only apply to the occupied and
occupied standby heating and cooling setpoints. These
setpoint limits do not apply to the unoccupied heating and
cooling setpoints stored in the controller’s configuration.
When the controller is in unoccupied mode, it always uses
the stored unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints.The
unit can also be configured to enable or disable the local
(hard-wired) setpoint. This parameter provides additional
flexibility to allow you to apply communicated, hardwired, or default setpoints without making physical
changes to the unit.
Similar to hard-wired setpoints, the effective setpoint
value for a communicated setpoint is determined based
on the stored default setpoints (which determines the
occupied and occupied standby temperature deadbands)
and the controller’s occupancy mode.

Fan Switch (Tracer ZN520)
The zone sensor fan switch provides the controller with an
occupied (and occupied standby) fan request signal (Off,
Low, Medium, High, Auto). If the fan control request is
communicated to the controller, the controller ignores the
hard-wired fan switch input and uses the communicated
value. The zone sensor fan switch input can be enabled or
98

disabled through configuration using the Rover service
tool. If the zone sensor switch is disabled, the controller
resorts to its stored configuration default fan speeds for
heating and cooling, unless the controller receives a
communicated fan input.
When the fan switch is in the off position, the controller
does not control any unit capacity. The unit remains
powered and all outputs drive to the closed position. Upon
a loss of signal on the fan speed input, the controller
reports a diagnostic and reverts to using the default fan
speed.

On/Cancel Buttons (Tracer ZN520)
Momentarily pressing the on button during unoccupied
mode places the controller in occupied bypass mode for
120 minutes. You can adjust the number of minutes in the
unit controller configuration using Rover service tool. The
controller remains in occupied bypass mode until the
override time expires or until you press the Cancel button.

Communication Jack (Tracer ZN520)
Use the RJ-11 communication as the connection point
from Rover service tool to the communication link—when
the communication jack is wired to the communication
link at the controller. By accessing the communication jack
via Rover, you can access any controller on the link.

Communications (Tracer ZN520)
Tracer ZN520 controller communicates via Trane’s LonTalk
protocol. Typically, a communication link is applied
between unit controllers and a building automation
system. Communication also is possible via Rover, Trane’s
service tool. Peer-to-peer communication across
controllers is possible even when a building automation
system is not present. You do not need to observe polarity
for LonTalk communication links.
The controller provides six 0.25-inch quick-connect
terminals for the LonTalk communication link connections,
as follows:
•

Two terminals for communication to the board

•

Two terminals for communication from the board to
the next unit (daisy chain)

•

Two terminals for a connection from the zone sensor
back to the controller

Table 33. Zone sensor wiring connections (Tracer ZN520)
TB1

Description

Space temperature / timed override detection

Common

Setpoint

Fan mode

Communications

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 99 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup

UC400 Sequence of Operation
The UC400 controller will operate to maintain the space
temperature setpoint. This section provides information
about sequence of operations.

Power-up Sequence (UC400)
When 24Vac power is initially applied to the UC400
controller, the following sequence occurs:
1. The Power Marquee LED turns on as red, then flashes
green, and then turns a solid green.
2. All outputs are controlled OFF and all modulating
valves and dampers close.
3. The controller reads all input local values to determine
initial values.
4. The random start timer begins (refer to the following
section, “Random Start (UC400)”).
5. The random start timer expires.
6. Normal operation begins, assuming there are no
generated diagnostics. If any points are in fault or
alarm mode, the Power Marquee LED flashes red.
Important:

Flashing red does not indicate that the
UC400 controller will fail to operate.
Instead, the point(s) that are in fault or alarm
mode should be checked to determine if the
status of the point(s) is acceptable to allow
equipment operation.

Random Start (UC400)
Random start is intended to prevent all units in a building
from energizing at the same time. The random start timer
delays the fan and any heating or cooling start-up from 5
to 30 seconds.

Occupancy Modes (UC400)
Occupancy modes can be controlled in the following ways:
•

The state of the local (hard wired) occupancy binary
input BI1.

•

A timed override request from a Trane zone sensor (see
“Timed Override Control (UC400),” p. 100).

•

A communicated signal from either a Tracer SC or BAS.

A communicated request, from either a Tracer SC or BAS,
takes precedence over local requests. If a communicated
occupancy request has been established, and is no longer
present, the controller reverts to the default (occupied)
occupancy mode after 15 minutes (if no hard wired
occupancy request exists). The UC400 controller has the
following occupancy modes:
•

Occupied

•

Unoccupied

•

Occupied standby

•

Occupied bypass

UNT-SVX07D-EN

Occupied Mode (UC400)
In Occupied Mode, the UC400 controller maintains the
space temperature based on the occupied space
temperature setpoint ± occupied offset. The controller
uses the occupied mode as a default mode when other
forms of occupancy request are not present and the fan
runs continuously. The outdoor air damper, if present, will
close when the fan is OFF. The temperature setpoints can
be local (hard wired), communicated, or stored default
values (configurable using the Tracer TU service tool).

Unoccupied Mode (UC400)
In unoccupied mode, the UC400 controller attempts to
maintain the space temperature based on the unoccupied
heating or cooling setpoint. The fan will cycle between
high speed and OFF. In addition, the outdoor air damper
remains closed, unless economizing. The controller
always uses the stored default setpoint values
(configurable using the Tracer TU service tool), regardless
of the presence of a hard wired or communicated setpoint
value.

Occupied Standby Mode (UC400)
The UC400 controller is placed in occupied standby mode
only when a communicated occupied request is combined
with an unoccupied request from occupancy binary input
BI1. In occupied standby mode, the controller maintains
the space temperature based on the occupied standby
heating or cooling setpoints. Because the occupied
standby setpoints have a typical temperature spread of 2°F
(1.1°C) in either direction, and the outdoor air damper is
closed, occupied standby mode reduces the demand for
heating and cooling the space. The fan will run as
configured (continuously) for occupied mode. The
controller always uses the stored default setpoint values
(configurable using the Tracer TU service tool), regardless
of hard wired or communicated setpoint values. In
addition, the outdoor air damper uses the economizer
occupied standby minimum position setpoint to reduce
the ventilation rate.

Occupied Bypass Mode (UC400)
The UC400 controller is placed in occupied bypass mode
when the controller is operating in the unoccupied mode
and when either the timed override ON button on the
Trane zone sensor is pressed or the controller receives a
communicated occupied bypass signal from a BAS. In
occupied bypass mode, the controller maintains the space
temperature based on the occupied heating or cooling
setpoints. The fan will run as configured (continuous or
cycling). The outdoor air damper closes when the fan is
OFF. The controller remains in occupied bypass mode
until either the CANCEL button is pressed on the Trane
zone sensor or the occupied bypass time (configurable
using the Tracer TU service tool) expires. The temperature
setpoints can configured as local (hard wired),
communicated, or stored default values using the Tracer
TU service tool.
99

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 100 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup

Timed Override Control (UC400)
If the UC400 controller has a timed override option
(ON/CANCEL buttons), pushing the ON button initiates a
timed override on request. A timed override on request
changes the occupancy mode from unoccupied mode to
occupied bypass mode. In occupied bypass mode, the
controller controls the space temperature based on the
occupied heating or cooling setpoints. The occupied
bypass time, which resides in the UC400 controller and
defines the duration of the override, is configurable from
0 to 240 minutes (default value of 120 minutes). When the
occupied bypass time expires, the unit transitions from
occupied bypass mode to unoccupied mode. Pushing the
CANCEL button cancels the timed override request. In
addition, it will end the timed override before the occupied
bypass time has expired and transition the unit from
occupied bypass mode to unoccupied mode.

If the discharge air temperature falls below the
discharge air temperature low limit setpoint,
(configurable using the Tracer TU service tool), and the
cooling capacity is at a minimum, the available heating
capacity is used to raise the discharge air temperature
to the low limit (refer to the following section,
“Discharge Air Tempering (UC400).”).
•

Simplified zone control— if discharge air
temperature failure occurs, then simplified zone
controls runs. In the unoccupied mode, the controller
maintains the zone temperature by calculating the
required heating or cooling capacity (0–100%)
according to the measured zone temperature and the
active zone temperature setpoint. The active zone
temperature setpoint is determined by the current
operating modes, which include occupancy and heat/
cool modes.

If the controller is in any mode other than unoccupied
mode when the ON button is pressed, the controller still
starts the occupied bypass timer without changing to
occupied bypass mode. If the controller is placed in
unoccupied mode before the occupied bypass timer
expires, the controller is placed into occupied bypass
mode and remains in this mode until either the CANCEL
button is pressed on the Trane zone sensor or the occupied
bypass time expires.

•

Discharge air temperature control— is the backup
mode that runs only if there is not valid zone
temperature. In this mode, the active space
temperature setpoint is used as the discharge air
temperature setpoint.

Zone Temperature Control (UC400)

Discharge Air Tempering (UC400)

The UC400 controller has three methods of zone
temperature control:

If the UC400 controller is in cooling mode, cascade zone
control initiates a discharge air tempering function when:

•

The discharge air temperature falls below the
discharge air temperature low limit setpoint
(configurable using the Tracer TU service tool)

•

All cooling capacity is at a minimum. The discharge air
tempering function allows the controller to provide
heating capacity (if available) to raise the discharge air
temperature to the discharge air temperature low limit
setpoint.

•

The cold outdoor air is brought in through the outdoor
air damper and when the damper is at (high) minimum
position. This causes the discharge air temperature to
fall below the discharge air temperature low limit
setpoint.

Cascade zone control—used in the occupied,
occupied bypass, and occupied standby modes. It
maintains zone temperature by controlling the
discharge air temperature to control the zone
temperature. The controller uses the difference
between the measured zone temperature and the
active zone temperature setpoint to produce a
discharge air temperature setpoint. The controller
compares the discharge air temperature setpoint with
the discharge air temperature and calculates a unit
heating/cooling capacity accordingly (refer to the
illustration below). The end devices (outdoor air
damper, valves, and so on) operate in sequence based
on the unit heating/cooling capacity (0–100 percent).
Active zone
temperature
setpoint

Difference

Measured
zone
temperature

100

Calculated
discharge air
temperature
setpoint

Difference

Measured
discharge air
temperature

Calculated unit
heating/cooling
capacity

Important: This is not a normal operating mode. The
source of the invalid zone temperature
needs to be corrected to restore normal
operation.

Heating or Cooling Mode (UC400)
The heating or cooling mode can be determined in one of
two ways:
•

By a communicated signal from a BAS or a peer
controller

•

Automatically, as determined by the UC400 controller

A communicated heating signal permits the controller to
only heat and a communicated cooling signal permits the
controller to only cool. A communicated auto signal
allows the controller to automatically change from heating
to cooling and vice versa.
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 101 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup
In heating or cooling mode, the controller maintains the
zone temperature based on the active heating setpoint and
the active cooling setpoint, respectively. The active
heating and cooling setpoints are determined by the
occupancy mode of the controller.
For 2-pipe and 4-pipe changeover units, normal heat/cool
operation will not begin until the ability to conduct the
desired heating or cooling operation is verified. This is
done using the entering water temperature sampling
function, for which a valid entering water temperature is
required. When neither a hard wired nor a communicated
entering water temperature value is present on
changeover units, the controller operates in only heating
mode and assumes the coil water is hot. The sampling
function is not used.
The entering water temperature sampling function is used
only for changeover applications and for information and
troubleshooting. It does not affect the operation of the
controller. (For more information, refer to the following
section, “Entering Water Temperature Sampling Function
(UC400)”.)

Entering Water Temperature Sampling
Function (UC400)
The entering water temperature sampling function is used
with 2-pipe and 4-pipe changeover units and requires a
valid entering water temperature value. If the entering
water temperature value is less than 5°F (2.8°C) above a
valid zone temperature value for hydronic heating, and
greater than 5°F (2.8°C) below a valid zone temperature
value for hydronic cooling, the sampling function is
enabled. When the sampling function is enabled, the
UC400 controller opens the main hydronic valve to allow
the water temperature to stabilize. After 3 minutes, the
controller again compares the entering water temperature
value to the zone temperature value to determine if the
desired heating or cooling function can be accomplished.
If the entering water temperature value remains out of
range to accomplish the desired heating/cooling function,
the controller closes the main hydronic valve and waits 60
minutes to attempt another sampling. If the entering water
temperature value falls within the required range, it
resumes normal heating/cooling operation and disables
the sampling function.

Fan Operation (UC400)
The UC400 controller supports 1-, 2-, 3-speed fans and
variable-speed fans. The fan always operates
continuously while either heating or cooling during
occupied, occupied standby, and occupied bypass
operation. During unoccupied operation, the fan cycles
between OFF and HIGH, regardless of the fan
configuration. When running in AUTO mode, the fan
operates differently based on the mode and the type of fan.
For 1-, 2-, and 3-speed fans, each time the fan is enabled,
the fan begins operation and runs on high speed for a
period of time (0.5 seconds for fan coils and 3 seconds for
UNT-SVX07D-EN

unit ventilators and blower coils) before changing to
another speed. Initially running on high speed provides
adequate torque to start the fan motor from the OFF
position.
Note: In occupied mode, the UC400 controller requires
continuous fan operation because of cascade zone
control. In unoccupied mode, the fan cycles.

Manual Fan Speed Control (UC400)
Regardless of the fan type, the fan runs continuously at the
desired fan speed during occupied, occupied standby, and
occupied bypass operation as follows:
•

When the controller receives a communicated fan
speed signal (HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW)

•

The associated fan speed switch is set to a specific fan
speed

•

The Supply Fan Speed Request point is overridden

During unoccupied operation, the fan cycles between OFF
and HIGH, regardless of the communicated fan speed
signal or fan speed switch setting (unless either of these is
OFF, which in turn, will control the fan OFF).
The fan turns OFF when:
•

The controller receives a communicated OFF signal

•

The fan speed switch is set to OFF

•

Specific diagnostics are generated

•

The default fan speed is set to OFF and the fan is
operating in the AUTO mode

Note: The supply fan speed source can be configured for
BAS, local, or default value control using the Tracer
TU service tool.

AUTO Fan Operation; 1-, 2-, 3-speed Fans
(UC400)
When the controller receives a communicated auto signal
(or the associated fan speed switch is set to AUTO with no
communicated value present), the fan operates in the
AUTO mode. In AUTO mode, the fan operates according
to the fan default (configurable using the Tracer TU service
tool). The fan speed has multiple speed configurations
(default is AUTO) or set to OFF for both heating and
cooling operation. When configured as AUTO (and with
multiple speeds available), the fan changes based on the
required capacity calculated by the control algorithm.

AUTO Fan Operation; ECM Energy Efficient
Mode (UC400)
When the controller is configured for Energy Efficient
Mode, by means of the Fan Operating Mode Request MV
point, the controller and daughter board will minimize
energy use by running the fan at the lowest possible speed
while maintaining space temperature. The controller will
fully utilize valves, economizer, or electric heat which
increases fan speed to meet space temperature (unless the
fan has been manually controlled. Refer to the preceding
101

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 102 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup
section, “Manual Fan Speed Control (UC400)”).

Modulating Valve Operation (UC400)

AUTO Fan Operation; ECM Acoustical Mode
(UC400)

The UC400 controller supports tri-state modulating valve
control. Two binary outputs control each valve: one to
drive the valve open and one to drive the valve closed. The
stroke time for each valve is configurable using the Tracer
TU service tool. The controller supports the following:

When the controller is configured for Acoustical Mode, by
means of the Fan Operating Mode Request MV point, the
controller and daughter board will minimize acoustical
nuisance by balancing changes in fan speed and total fan
noise. The controller will fully OPEN cooling and heating
valves before increasing fan speed to meet space
temperature (unless the fan has been manually controlled.
Refer to the preceding section, “Manual Fan Speed
Control (UC400)”). If multiple stages of electric heat exist
the controller will use a single minimum air flow for each
stage.

Exhaust Control (UC400)
Exhaust control is achieved by a single-speed exhaust fan
and controlled by binary output 2 (BO2). Exhaust control,
if not present, can be enabled by selecting Yes under the
Exhaust Fan Selection on the Tracer TU Configuration
page under the Equipment Options group.
Note: Exhaust fan configuration cannot be selected with
3-speed fan operation.
Important:

If exhaust control is added to an existing
configuration, all other configuration
options should be verified to match the
correct equipment options.Temperature
and flow setpoints will revert to default
values.

The exhaust function is coordinated with the supply fan
and outdoor/return air dampers as follows:
•

The exhaust fan energizes when the fan is running and
when the outdoor air damper position is greater than
or equal to the exhaust fan enable position (or the
outside air damper position at which the exhaust fan
turns ON).

•

The exhaust fan turns OFF when the fan either turns
OFF or the outdoor air damper closes to 10 percent
below the exhaust fan enable position.

•

If the exhaust fan/damper enable setpoint is less than
10 percent, the exhaust output is energized if the
outdoor air damper position is at the setpoint and deenergized at 0.

•

Heating

•

Cooling

•

Heat/cool changeover with a single valve and coil for 2pipe applications

•

Cooling or heat, cool changeover with the main valve,
and coil

•

Only heating with the auxiliary valve and coil for 4-pipe
applications

The controller moves the modulating valve to the desired
positions based on heating or cooling requirements.

Modulating Valve Calibration (UC400)
Modulating valve calibration is automatic. During normal
controller operation, the UC400 overdrives the actuator
(135 percent of the stroke time) whenever there is a
request for a position of 0 percent or 100 percent. At either
power-up, after a power outage, or when the occupancy
status changes to unoccupied, the controller first drives all
modulating valves (and dampers) to the closed position.
The controller calibrates to the fully CLOSED position by
over driving the actuator (135 percent of the stroke time).
Thereafter, the controller resumes normal operation.

Two-position Valve Operation (UC400)
The UC400 controller supports two-position valves with a
single binary output for each valve. Controllers used for
2-pipe applications support heating, cooling, or heat/cool
changeover with a single valve/coil. A controller used for
4-pipe applications supports cooling or heat/cool
changeover with a main valve/coil and heating only with
an auxiliary valve/coil.

Modulating Outdoor/Return Air Damper
(UC400)
The UC400 controller operates the modulating outdoor/
return air dampers based on the following:
•

Occupancy mode

Valve Operation (UC400)

•

Outdoor air temperature (communicated or hard wired
sensor)

The UC400 controller supports one or two modulating or
two-position valves, depending on the application (refer
Table 34, p. 103). The controller opens and closes the
appropriate valve(s) to maintain the active zone
temperature setpoint at the heating setpoint in heating
mode or the cooling setpoint in cooling mode (refer to
“Cascade Zone Control,” p. 100).

•

Zone temperature

•

Setpoint

•

Discharge air temperature

•

Discharge air temperature setpoint

102

The minimum position for an outdoor air damper is
configurable using the Tracer TU service tool for both
occupied mode and occupied standby mode and for low-

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 103 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup
speed fan operation. A controller can receive a BAScommunicated outdoor air damper minimum position.
A BAS-communicated minimum position setpoint has
priority over all locally configured setpoints. When a
communicated minimum position setpoint is not present,
the controller uses the configured minimum position for
low fan speed whenever the fan is running at low speed,
regardless of the occupancy state. Refer to Table 34 and
Table 35 for more information about how the controller
determines the position of the modulating outdoor air
damper.
Table 34. Modulating outdoor air damper position
setpoint determination (UC400)

Occupancy

BAScommunicated
Setpoint

Fan
speed

Active
Minimum
Setpoint

Unoccupied

Any value

Any value 0% (closed).

• Occupied
• Occupied bypass
• Occupied standby

Valid

Any value BAScommunicated.

• Occupied
• Occupied bypass
• Occupied standby

Invalid

Low

Occupied low fan
minimum.

• Occupied
• Occupied bypass

Invalid

Medium/
high

Occupied
minimum.

Occupied standby

Invalid

Medium/
high

Occupied
standby
minimum.

Table 35. Relationship between outdoor temperature
sensors and damper position (UC400)

applications with modulating outside air damper, support
economizing. The modulating outdoor air damper
provides the first source of cooling for the controller.
The controller initiates economizing if the outdoor air
temperature is below the economizer enable point
(configurable using the Tracer TU service tool). If
economizing is initiated, the controller modulates the
outdoor air damper (between the active minimum damper
position and 100 percent) to control the amount of outdoor
air cooling capacity. When the outdoor air temperature
rises 5°F (2.8°C) above the economizer enable point, the
controller disables economizing and moves the outdoor
air damper back to its predetermined minimum position,
based on the current occupancy mode or communicated
minimum outdoor air damper position. If an outdoor air
temperature value is not present, economizing is disabled.

Two-position Control Of A Modulating
Outdoor Air Damper (UC400)
The UC400 controller supports two-position outdoor air
damper actuators. However, a modulating outdoor/return
air damper actuator can be used for two-position control.
Two-position control can be achieved by not providing an
outdoor air temperature (neither hard wired nor
communicated) to the controller, and by setting the
damper minimum position (using the Tracer TU service
tool) to the desired value, typically 100 percent.

Electric Heat Operation (UC400)

Failed outdoor air Open to occupied Open to occupied Closed.
standby minimum
sensor.
minimum
position.
position.

The UC400 controller supports both SCR (modulating) and
staged electric heat (1- or 2-stages). SCR heat is only a
field-installed option. In a unit configured with staged
electric heat, the electric heating circuit(s) are cycled ON
and OFF appropriately to maintain the desired space
temperature at the active heating setpoint. In a unit
configured with SCR (modulating) electric heat, the UC400
will send a 0 to 10 Volt DC signal to adjust SCR capacity in
order to maintain the desired space temperature.

Outdoor air
temperature
present and
economizing
possible (Refer to
section,
“Economizing
(Free Cooling)
(UC400),”
p. 103).

In both staged and modulating electric heat applications,
the simultaneous use of electric and hydronic heat is not
supported and the UC400 will operate electric heat only
when hot water is not available (for example, in a
changeover unit). In addition, the UC400 will run the
supply fan for 30 seconds after electric heat is turned OFF
in order to dissipate heat from the unit

Modulating outdoor air damper position
Outdoor Air
Temperature

Occupied or
Occupied
Bypass

No or invalid
outdoor air
temperature.

Open to occupied Open to occupied Closed.
standby minimum
minimum
position.
position.

Economizing;
damper
controlled
between occupied
minimum
position and
100%.

Occupied
Standby

Economizing;
damper
controlled
between occupied
standby
minimum position
and 100%.

Unoccupied

Open and
economizing
during unit
operation;
otherwise closed.

Outdoor air
Open to occupied Open to occupied Closed.
temperature
standby minimum
minimum
present and
position.
position.
economizing not
possible (Refer to
section,
“Economizing
(Free Cooling)
(UC400),”
p. 103).

Economizing (Free Cooling) (UC400)
Cooling with outdoor air (during the times when the
temperature is low enough to allow) is referred to as
economizing (free cooling). The UC400 controller and
UNT-SVX07D-EN

Note: This delay does not apply to steam or hydronic
heating.
Factory-configured electric heat units have built-in
mechanical protections to prevent dangerously high
discharge air temperatures.

Dehumidification Operation (UC400)
The UC400 controller supports space dehumidification
when:
•

Mechanical (DX or hydronic) cooling is available

103

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 104 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup
•

The heating capacity is located in the reheat position

Fan Status (UC400)

•

The space relative humidity is valid

In 1-, 2- and 3-speed fans, the status is based on the
statuses of the supply fan output multistate and analog
points dedicated to fan control. The fan status is reported
as HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW, and as a percentage, whenever
the fan is running. The fan status is reported as OFF
whenever the fan is not running. In addition, a fan status
switch can be connected to binary input 5 (BI5) to monitor
the status of the fan for belt-driven or direct-driven units
(except Trane Macon factory ECM fan motor units). The fan
status switch provides feedback to the controller as
follows:

The space relative humidity can be a BAS-communicated
value or come directly from a wired relative humidity
sensor. The controller begins to dehumidify the space
when the space humidity exceeds the humidity setpoint.
The controller continues to dehumidify until the sensed
humidity falls below the setpoint minus the relative
humidity offset.

Peer-to-peer Communication (UC400)
Peer-to-peer communication is accomplished by means of
custom TGP2 programming in the Tracer SC system
controller or via hard wiring only between controllers.

Unit Protection Strategies (UC400)

•

If the fan is not operating when the controller has the
fan controlled to ON, the controller generates a Low
Airflow-Supply Fan Failure diagnostic.

•

If the UC400 controller energizes the fan output for
1 minute, and the fan status switch indicates no fan
operation, the controller performs a unit shutdown
and generates a Low Airflow-Supply Fan Failure
diagnostic.

•

If the fan has been operating normally for one minute,
but the fan status switch indicates no fan operation, the
same diagnostic is generated.

The following unit protection strategies are initiated when
specific conditions exist in order to protect the unit or
building from damage:
•

Smart reset

•

Low coil temperature protection

•

Condensate overflow

•

Fan status

•

Fan off delay

•

Filter maintenance timer

•

Freeze avoidance

•

Freeze protection (discharge air temperature low limit)

Smart Reset (UC400)
The UC400 controller will automatically restart a unit that
is locked out as a result of a Low Coil Temp Detection
(BI3) diagnostic. Referred to as smart reset, this automatic
restart will occur 30 minutes after the diagnostic occurs. If
the unit is successfully restarted, the diagnostic is cleared.
If the unit undergoes another Low Coil Temp Detection
diagnostic within a 24-hour period, the unit will be locked
out until it is manually reset.
Note: Freeze protection will also perform a smart reset.

Low Coil Temperature Protection (UC400)
For more information refer to Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance: Tracer™ UC400 Programmable Controller
Factory- or Field-installed for Blower Coil and Fan Coil
(BAS-SVX48B-EN, or the most recent revision) and the
preceding section, “Smart Reset (UC400)”.

Condensate Overflow (UC400)
For more information refer to Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance: Tracer™ UC400 Programmable Controller
Factory- or Field-installed for Blower Coil and Fan Coil
(BAS-SVX48B-EN, or the most recent revision).

104

This manual diagnostic discontinues unit operation until
the diagnostic has been cleared from the controller. If a
diagnostic reset is sent to the controller, and the fan
condition still exists, the controller attempts to run the fan
for 1 minute before generating another diagnostic and
performing a unit shutdown. A diagnostic reset can be
sent to the controller from the Tracer TU Alarms page or by
temporarily overriding the Reset Diagnostic Request on
the Tracer TU Binary Status page.
Note: In the ECM fan application, the ECM engine board
will monitor the status of the fan. In case of a
failure, the engine board will disable the motor
immediately, and the low airflow diagnostic is sent.

Fan Off Delay (UC400)
After heating has been controlled OFF, the UC400
controller keeps the fan energized for an additional 30
seconds in order to remove residual heat from the heating
source.

Filter Maintenance Timer (UC400)
The filter maintenance timer tracks the amount of time (in
hours) that the fan is enabled. The Filter Runtime Hours
Setpoint (configurable using the Tracer TU service tool) is
used to set the amount of time until maintenance
(typically, a filter change) is required. The timer can be
enabled/disabled from the Supply Fan group on the
Setup Parameters page in Tracer TU.
The UC400 controller compares the fan run time to filter
runtime hours setpoint. Once the setpoint is reached, the
controller generates a Filter Change Required
diagnostic. When the diagnostic is cleared, the controller
resets the filter maintenance timer to zero, and the timer
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 105 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Startup
begins accumulating fan run time again. The diagnostics
can be cleared and the filter timer reset by temporarily
overriding the Filter Timer Reset Request on the Binary
Status page or by using the reset button on the Alarms
page in Tracer TU.

Freeze Avoidance (UC400)
Freeze avoidance is used for low ambient temperature
protection. It is initiated only when the fan is OFF. The
UC400 controller enters the freeze avoidance mode when
the outdoor air temperature is below the freeze avoidance
setpoint (configurable using the Tracer TU service tool).
The controller disables freeze avoidance when the outdoor
air temperature rises 3°F (1.7°C) above the freeze
avoidance setpoint.
The following occurs when the controller is in freeze
avoidance mode:
•

Valves are driven open to allow water to flow through
the coil

•

Fan is OFF

•

Economizing is disabled

•

The outdoor/return air damper is closed

•

DX cooling is OFF

•

Electric heat stages are OFF

Freeze Protection (Discharge Air Temperature
Low Limit) (UC400)
The UC400 controller monitors the discharge air
temperature with a 10 kΩ thermistor wired to AI4. The
freeze protection operation is initiated whenever the
discharge air temperature falls below the discharge air
temperature low limit. The discharge air temperature low
limit is configurable using the Tracer TU service tool.
During freeze protection, the controller increases the
heating capacity or decreases the cooling capacity in order
to raise the discharge air temperature above the low limit.
If the discharge air temperature remains below the low
limit for 3 minutes, the controller generates a Discharge
Air Temp Limit diagnostic.
Freeze protection will also perform a smart reset. Refer to
“Smart Reset (UC400),” p. 104.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

105

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 106 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Maintenance
Maintenance Procedures
Perform the following maintenance procedures to ensure
proper unit operation.

WARNING
Live Electrical Components!
During installation, testing, servicing and
troubleshooting of this product, it may be necessary to
work with live electrical components. Have a qualified
licensed electrician or other individual who has been
properly trained in handling live electrical components
perform these tasks. Failure to follow all electrical
safety precautions when exposed to live electrical
components could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE:
Replace All Panels and Filters Properly!
All unit panels and filters must be in place prior to unit
startup. Failure to have panels and filters in place could
result in equipment damage.

Inspecting and Cleaning Drain Pans
Clean the fan-coil unit’s main and auxiliary drain pans to
ensure the unit drains condensate properly.
Check the condensate drain pan and drain line to assure
the condensate drains properly at least every six months
or as dictated by operating experience.
If evidence of standing water or condensate overflow
exists, immediately identify and remedy the cause.

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors!

Clean the drain pans of any moisture or debris.

1. To remove the auxiliary drain pan, loosen the hose
clamp (installer supplied) around the drain connection
collar and disconnect the drain line.

For additional information regarding the safe discharge of
capacitors, see PROD-SVB06A-EN

Air Filters

Auxiliary Drain Pan

2. Remove the overflow drain line to the auxiliary drain
pan if it was installed.
3. Remove the condensate overflow switch option from
the auxiliary drain pan.
4. Slide the pan horizontally towards the end of the large
groove of the mounting slots in the chassis end panel
and remove pan from unit (see Figure 37).
Figure 37.

Insert the auxiliary drain pan tabs into these
slots in the fan-coil’s chassis end panel
(horizontal unit shown).

Change or clean air filters at least twice a year. Filters
require more frequent care under high load or dirty air
conditions since a clogged filter reduces airflow. Table 1,
p. 12 lists filter size and quantity by unit size. Throwaway
and pleated media filters are available for all units. Follow
the instructions below to replace the disposable filters.

All Models Except Vertical Cabinets
Remove the front panel of the vertical recessed unit and
open the bottom panel door of the horizontal cabinet and
horizontal recessed unit to access the filter. The front panel
of the vertical cabinet unit does not require removal to
change the filter.

Aux. Drain Pan Attaches to These Slots

Note: Vertical recessed, horizontal cabinet, and
horizontal recessed units with a bottom return have
filter guides to secure the filter in position. Also, if
these unit types have a fresh air opening, they
require an additional filter for the fresh air opening.

106

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 107 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Maintenance
Main Drain Pan
See Figure 38 to replace main drain correctly.
Figure 38. When replacing the fan-coil’s main drain pan,
install it correctly under the z-bar.

Figure 40. To remove the main drain pan on horizontal
fan-coil units, peel the insulation from the
edges of the pan’s underside to access the
mounting screws.
Mounting Screw

Coil

Side

Main Drain

Z-Bar

Vertical Units. To remove the main drain pan on vertical
fan-coil units, disconnect the clips holding the pan to the
fanboard. Disconnect the main and overflow drain hoses
and slide pan forward to remove (see Figure 39).
Figure 39. To remove the main drain pan on vertical fancoil units, disconnect the clips holding the
pan to the fanboard.
Clips Hold Drain Pan in Place

Note: Do not operate the fan-coil unit without the main
and auxiliary drain pans in place to prevent
condensate leakage.

Coil Maintenance
Keep coils clean to maintain maximum performance. For
operation at its highest efficiency, clean the coil often
during periods of high demand or when dirty conditions
prevail. Clean the coil a minimum of once a year to prevent
dirt buildup in the coil fins, where it may not be visible.
Remove large debris from the coils and straighten fins
before cleaning. Remove filters before cleaning.
Clean the coil fins using steam with detergent, hot water
spray and detergent, or a commercially available chemical
coil cleaner. Be sure to rinse coils thoroughly after
cleaning.

WARNING
Hazardous Chemicals!
Horizontal Units. To remove the main drain pan on a
horizontal fan-coil unit, peel the insulation from the edges
of the pan’s underside to access the mounting screws.
Remove the screws and lower the end of the drain pan
closest to the control box. Remove the drain spout by
pulling it from the hole in the chassis end panel (see
Figure 40).

Coil cleaning agents can be either acidic or highly
alkaline. Handle chemical carefully. Proper handling
should include goggles or face shield, chemical
resistant gloves, boots, apron or suit as required. For
personal safety refer to the cleaning agent
manufacturer’s Materials Safety Data Sheet and follow
all recommended safe handling practices. Failure to
follow all safety instructions could result in death or
serious injury.

Inspecting and Cleaning Coils
Coils become externally fouled as a result of normal
operation. Dirt on the coil surface reduces it’s ability to
transfer heat that can result in comfort problems,
increased airflow resistance and thus increased operating
energy costs. If the coil surface dirt becomes wet, which
commonly occurs with cooling coils, microbial growth
(mold) may result, causing unpleasant odors and serious
health-related indoor air quality problems.
Inspect coils at least every six months or more frequently
as dictated by operating experience. Cleaning frequently
UNT-SVX07D-EN

107

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 108 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Maintenance
is dependent upon system operating hours, filter
maintenance, and efficiency and dirt load. Follow the
suggested methods in the following paragraphs.

Steam and Hydronic Coil Cleaning Procedure
1. Disconnect all electrical power to the unit.
2. Don the appropriate personal protective equipment
(PPE).
3. Access both sides of the coil.
4. Use a soft brush to remove loose debris from both
sides of the coil.
5. Use a steam cleaning machine, starting from the top of
the coil and working downward. Clean the leaving air
side of the coil first, then the entering air side. Use a
block-off to prevent steam from blowing through the
coil and into a dry section of the unit.

6. Repeat step five as necessary. Confirm that the drain
line is open following completion of the cleaning
process.

Vertical Units.

2. Pull the main and overflow drain hoses of the main
drain pan into the inside of the fan-coil chassis end
panel.

Allow the unit to dry thoroughly before putting the
system back into service.

8. Straighten any coil fins that may be damaged with a fin
rake.

1. Remove the front panel of cabinet and recessed units.

3. Remove the two fanboard mounting screws.

9. Replace all panels and parts and restore electrical
power to the unit.

4. Slide the fanboard out horizontally to remove.

Winterizing the Coil

1. Open the bottom panel of cabinet and recessed
models.

Make provisions to drain coils that are not in use,
especially when subjected to freezing temperatures.
To drain the coil, blow the coil out with compressed air.
Next, fill and drain the tubes with full-strength ethylene
glycol several times. Drain the coil as completely as
possible.

NOTICE:
Coil Freeze-up Damage!
Failure to properly drain and vent coils when not in use
during freezing temperatures may result in coil freezeup damage.

Fan Board Assembly Removal
Follow the procedure below when replacing the coil or
making repairs to the fan or motor.

108

Horizontal Units.

2. Remove the main drain pan following the instructions
given under the drain pan section above for horizontal
fan-coil units.
3. While supporting the fanboard in place, remove the
two fanboard mounting screws which secure the
fanboard to the unit.

Replacing Motors
NOTICE:
Heavy Object!
Support the fanboard when removing it from the unit.
Failure to properly support fanboard may result in
minor to moderate personal injury.
Motors are attached to the fan boards with screws at the
rear of the motors. Fan wheels are attached with Allen
screws on the fan hubs. In most applications, it is
necessary to remove the fan board to change out the
motor. The fan board is easily removable, with screws on
the front left and right edges of fan boards (vertical units)
or on the front left underside and front right underside of
the fan board (horizontal units).

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 109 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Maintenance
Vertical Units

Routing Motor and Crossover Harnesses

Notes:
•

In vertical units, wiring to the motor transitions from
the control panel onto a trough onto the fan board.

•

The motor harnesses are routed through holes at the
motor location below the fan board and into the
motors with a latching multi-plug.

•

The crossover harnesses, which are used to make
connections to the piping side of the unit, are routed in
the same manner but continue to the piping side
entirely through the trough on the fan board.

•

On vertical fan-coil units with drain pans, a drain pan
support covers most of the wiring. Please be sure to
remove or secure the wiring before removing fan
board.

•

Fan board attachment screws are located on the front
left and right edges of fan boards, and may be
concealed by gasketing.

Fan board attachment
screw locations on
vertical units may be
hidden behind “H”
insulation.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

109

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 110 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Maintenance
Figure 41.

Motor attachment screws (located behind
motor)

2. Remove drain pan and drain pan support (vertical
units) or remove drain pan (horizontal units).
3. Free the motor and crossover harnesses from the fan
board, either by unplugging from the motors and
valves and threading backwards, or by unplugging the
motor plug from the adapter boards.
4. Remove the fan board attachment screws and carefully
lower/slide out fan board.
5. Remove at least one fan housing and loosen fan Allen
screw on first fan. Loosen the wheel of the other (if a
double-shafted motor).
6. Unscrew the motor and remove.
7.

Insert the replacement motor (plug must face front of
fan board) and drive the screws in with 100 in·lb of
torque.

Control Device Replacement
Note: Motor plug with latch.

Horizontal Units
Notes:
•

In horizontal units, wiring to the motor is routed below
the fan board but is wire-tied to the fan board for
harness management and to avoid sharp edges.

•

The motor harnesses terminate at the motor location
with a latching multi-plug.

•

The crossover harnesses, which are used to make
connections to the piping side of the unit, are routed
initially below the fan board, but transition into a
trough on the top side of the fan board, and into the
piping section of the unit.
Fan board attachment screws are located on the front
left underside and front right underside of the fan
board.

Work Instruction Steps

To order control components such as relays, contactors,
transformers, low temperature detection devices,
condensate overflow detection devices, differential
pressure switches, sensors, control valves and actuators,
contact the local Trane Service Parts Center. To order, the
Trane parts center will need the unit model number (which
can be found on the unit nameplate), the serial number,
and the part name or ID.

Periodic Maintenance Checklists
Monthly Checklist
The following check list provides the recommended
maintenance schedule to keep the unit running efficiently.

In general, replacement of a motor needs to be carried out
as follows:
1. Remove front panels of unit.
110

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 111 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Maintenance

Monthly Maintenance
1. Inspect unit air filters. Clean or replace if airflow is
blocked or if filters are dirty.
2. Check the main and auxiliary drain pans on fan-coil
units to be sure the pans are clean and do not impede
the condensate flow through the drain line.

Annual Maintenance
Check and tighten all set screws, bolts, locking collars and
sheaves.
1. Inspect the unit cabinetry for chips or corrosion. Clean
or repair to provide unit protection.
2. Inspect the fan wheel and housing for damage. Rotate
the fan wheel manually to be sure movement is not
blocked by obstructions.
3. Inspect the coil fins for excessive dirt or damage.
Remove dirt and straighten fins.
4. Clean and tighten all electrical connections.
5. Inspect the strainer option for debris trapped in the
filter screen.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

111

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 112 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics
Output Testing and Diagnostics
(Tracer ZN520)
Table 36. Tracer ZN520 diagnostics
Diagnostic

Fan Other Outputs(a)

Condensate
overflow

Off

Valves Closed, Fresh air damper Closed, Electric
heat Off, Baseboard heat Off

Possible diagnostics include:
• Low temperature detection
• Condensate overflow
• Low air flow—fan status
• Discharge air temp limit
• Space temperature failure1
• Entering water temp failure1
• Discharge air temp failure1
• Outdoor air temp failure1
• Local setpoint failure1
• Local fan mode failure1
• CO2 sensor failure1
• Generic AIP failure1
• Humidity input failure1
• Defrosting compressor lockout1
• Maintenance required
• Invalid unit configuration
• Generic temperature failure
• Discharge air low limit

Low temperature Off
detection

Valves Open, Fresh air damper Closed, Electric heat
Off, Baseboard heat Off

Low air flow - fan Off
failure

Valves Closed, Fresh air damper Closed, Electric
heat Off, Baseboard heat Off

Space
temperature
failure

Off

Valves Closed, Fresh air damper Closed, Electric
heat Off, Baseboard heat Off

Entering water
temp failure

Valves Enabled(b), Fresh air damper Enabled(b),
Electric heat Enabled(b), Baseboard heat Off

Discharge air
temp low limit

Off

Valves Open, Fresh air damper Closed, Electric heat
Off, Baseboard heat Off

Discharge air
temp failure

Off

Valves Closed, Fresh air damper Closed, Electric
heat Off, Baseboard heat Off

Fresh air temp
failure

Valves Enabled, Fresh air damper Minimum
position(c), Electric heat Enabled, Baseboard heat
Enabled

Relative humidity On
failure

Valves Enabled, Fresh air damper Enabled, Electric
heat Enabled, Baseboard heat Enabled

There are a number of ways in which diagnostics are reset:

Generic 4–20mA On
failure

Valves Enabled, Fresh air damper Enabled, Electric
heat Enabled, Baseboard heat Enabled

1. Automatic reset by the controller

CO2 Input failure On

Valves Enabled, Fresh air damper Enabled, Electric
heat Enabled, Baseboard heat Enabled

2. By initiating a manual output test at the controller

Maintenance
required

Valves Enabled, Fresh air damper Enabled, Electric
heat Enabled, Baseboard heat Enabled

Local fan mode
failure

Valves Enabled, Fresh air damper Enabled, Electric
heat Enabled, Baseboard heat Enabled

Local setpoint
failure

Valves Enabled, Fresh air damper Enabled, Electric
heat Enabled, Baseboard heat Enabled

Invalid unit
configuration

Off

Valves Disabled, Fresh air damper Disabled,
Electric heat Disabled, Baseboard heat Disabled

Normal—power
up

Valves Enabled, Fresh air damper Enabled, Electric
heat Enabled

(a) The generic binary output (TB4-1, TB4-2) state is unaffected by all unit
diagnostics.
(b) When the entering water temperature is required but not present, the
Tracer ZN520 controller generates a diagnostic to indicate the sensor
loss condition. The controller automatically clears the diagnostic once
a valid entering water temperature value is present (non-latching diagnostic). When the entering water temperature sensor fails, the controller prohibits all hydronic cooling operation, but allows the delivery
of heat when heating is required. In the Cool mode, all cooling is lockedout, but normal fan and outdoor air damper operation is permitted.
(c) When the outdoor air temperature sensor has failed or is not present,
the Tracer ZN520 controller generates a diagnostic to indicate the sensor loss condition. The controller automatically clears the diagnostic
once a valid outdoor air temperature value is present (non-latching diagnostic). When the outdoor air temperature sensor fails or is not present, the controller prohibits economizer operation.

Translating Multiple Diagnostics (Tracer
ZN520)
The controller senses and records each diagnostic
independently of other diagnostics. It is possible to have
multiple diagnostics present simultaneously. The
diagnostics are reported in the order they occur.

Resetting Diagnostics (Tracer ZN520)

3. By cycling power to the controller
4. Through Rover, Trane’s service tool
5. Tracer ZN520: by using any other communicating
device ab le to access the controller’s diagnostic reset
input.
6. Tracer ZN520: by cycling the fan switch from Off to any
speed setting.

Automatic Reset by the Controller (Tracer
ZN520)
The controller includes an automatic diagnostic reset
function that attempts to automatically restore the unit
when a low temperature diagnostic occurs.
Note: The controller implements the automatic
diagnostic reset function only once every 24 hours.
For the controller to increment the 24 hour timer,
you must maintain power to the controller. Cycling
power resets all timers and counters.
After the controller detects the first special diagnostic, the
unit waits 30 minutes before invoking the automatic
diagnostic reset function. The automatic diagnostic reset
function clears the special diagnostic and attempts to
restore the controller to normal operation. The controller
resumes normal operation until another diagnostic
occurs.

Non-latching diagnostics automatically reset when the input is present and valid.

112

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 113 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics
Note: The automatic diagnostic reset function does not
operate during the manual output test sequence.

Diagnostic Reset (Tracer ZN520)

If a special diagnostic occurs within 24 hours after an
automatic diagnostic reset, the controller must be
manually reset. Other possible methods of resetting
diagnostics are described in the sections that follow.

Any device that can communicate the network variable
nviRequest (enumeration “clear_alarm”) can reset
diagnostics in the Tracer ZN520 controller.The controller
also attempts to reset diagnostics whenever power is
cycled.

Manual Output Test (Tracer ZN520)

Cycling the Fan Switch (Tracer ZN520)

To verify proper end device operation, press the
controller’s Test button. This exercise will verify all outputs
in a predefined sequence, the first of which will attempt to
reset the controller diagnostics if any are present.

Cycle the fan speed switch from Off to any speed and the
controller resets all diagnostics. Diagnostics may recur
immediately if the problem still exists.

Cycling Power to the Controller (Tracer ZN520)
After removing and reapplying the 24 Vac power from the
board, the unit cycles through a power-up sequence. By
default, the controller attempts to reset all diagnostics
present at power-up. Diagnostics present at power-up and
those that occur after power-up are handled according to
Table 37.
Table 37.

Table 38. Fan outputs do not energize (Tracer ZN520)
Probable
Cause

Power-up
control wait

Diagnostic
Auxiliary temp.
failure

Latching? Fan

2. The controller exits power-up control wait once the
power-up control wait time expires.

Damper

Enable No
d
action

No action No action

Condensate overflow
Yes
detection

Off

Entering water temp.
No
failure

Enable
Enabled Enabled
d

Enabled

Fan mode failure

Enable
Enabled Enabled
d

Enabled

Disable
Disabled Disabled
d

Disabled

Low temp. detection Yes

Off

Closed

Maintenance
required

Yes

Enable No
d
action

No action No action

Setpoint

Enable No
d
action

No action No action

Zone temp. failure

Off

Invalid unit
Yes
configuration failure

Closed

Open

Closed

Off

When power-up control wait is enabled (non-zero time), the
controller remains off until one of two conditions occurs:
1. The controller exits power-up control wait once it receives
communicated information.

Tracer ZN510 controller diagnostics
Elec
Valves Heat

Explanation

Random start After power-up, the controller always observes a random
start that varies observed between 0 and 25 seconds. The
controller remains off until the random start time expires.

Closed

Notes:
1. Priority Level: Diagnostics are listed in order from highest to lowest
priority. The controller senses and records each diagnostic
independently of other diagnostics. It is possible to have multiple
diagnostics present simultaneously. The diagnostics affect unit
operation according to priority level.
2. Latching: A latching diagnostic requires a manual reset of the
controller; while a non-latching diagnostic automatically resets when
the input is present and valid.
3. Enabled: End device is allowed to run if there is a call for it to run.
4. Disabled: End device is not allowed to run even if there is a call for it
to run.
5. No Action: The diagnostic has no affect on the end device.

Cycling fan
operation

When the fan mode switch is in the auto position, the unit
fan cycles off when there is no call for heating or cooling. The
heating/cooling sources cycle on or off periodically with the
unit fan to match the capacity according to pulse-widthmodulation (PWM) logic.

Unoccupied
operation

The fan cycles with capacity when the unit is in unoccupied
mode. This occurs even if the unit is in continuous fan
operation. While unoccupied, the fan cycles on or off with
heating/cooling to provide varying amounts of heating or
cooling to the space to match the to pulse-width-modulation
(PWM) logic.

Fan mode off When using the local fan mode switch to determine the fan
operation, the off position controls the unit fan to off.
Requested
mode: off

It is possible to communicate the operating mode (such as
off, heat, and cool) to the controller. When “off” is
communicated to the controller, the unit controls the fan to
off. The unit is not capable of heating or cooling when the
controller is in this mode.

Diagnostic
present

A specific list of diagnostics effects fan operation. For more
information, see “Diagnostics,” p. 112.

No power to If the controller does not have power, the unit fan will not
the controller operate. For the controller to operate normally, it must have
an input voltage of 24 Vac. When the green LED is off
continuously, the controller does not have sufficient power
or the controller has failed.
Manual output The controller includes a manual output test sequence to
test
verify binary output operation and the associated wiring.
However, based on the current step in the test sequence, the
unit fan may not be powered on. Refer to “Manual Output
Test (Tracer ZN520),” p. 113.
Unit wiring

The wiring between the controller outputs and the fan relays
and contacts must be present and correct for normal fan
operation. Refer to the typical unit wiring diagrams (see
“Wiring Diagrams,” p. 133).

Using Trane’s Service Tool, Rover (Tracer
ZN520)
Rover, Trane’s service tool, can reset diagnostics present in
the controller and troubleshoot the unit. For more
information, refer to the Trane publication EMTX-SVX01GEN (Rover Service Tool: Installation, Operation, and
Programming Guide).

UNT-SVX07D-EN

113

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 114 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics
Table 39. Valves stay closed (Tracer ZN520)

Table 41. Electric heat not operating (Tracer ZN520)

Probable
Cause

Explanation

Probable
Cause

Explanation

Normal
operation

The controller opens and closes the valves to meet the unit
capacity requirements.

Normal
operation

The controller cycles electric heat on and off to meet the
unit capacity requirements.

Requested
mode: off

It is possible to communicate the operating mode (such as
off, heat, and cool) to the controller. When off is
communicated to the controller, the unit controls the fan to
off. The unit is not capable of heating or cooling when the
controller is in this mode.

Requested
mode: off

It is possible to communicate the operating mode (such as
off, heat, cool) to the controller. When off is communicated
to the controller, the units shuts off the electric heat.

Valve override The controller can communicate a valve override request.
This request affects the valve operation.

Communicated Numerous communicated requests may disable electric
disable
heat, including an auxiliary heat enable input and the heat/
cool mode input. Depending on the state of the
communicated request, the unit may disable electric heat.

Manual output The controller includes a manual output test sequence to
test
verify analog and binary output operation and the associated
wiring. However, based on the current step in the test
sequence, the valves may not be open. Refer to “Manual
Output Test (Tracer ZN520),” p. 113.

Manual output The controller includes a manual output test sequence that
test
verifies analog and binary output operation and associated
output wiring. However, based on the current step in the
test sequence, the electric heat may not be on. Refer to
“Manual Output Test (Tracer ZN520),” p. 113.

Diagnostic
present

A specific list of diagnostics affects valve operation. For more
information, see “Diagnostics,” p. 112.

Diagnostic
present

A specific list of diagnostics affects electric heat operation.
For more information, see “Diagnostics,” p. 112.

Sampling
logic

The controller includes entering water temperature
sampling logic that automatically invokes during 2-pipe or
4-pipe changeover. It determines when the entering water
temperature is either too cool or too hot for the desired
heating or cooling mode. Refer to “Entering Water
Temperature Sampling Function (Tracer ZN010 and
ZN510),” p. 89.

Unit
configuration

The controller must be properly configured based on the
actual installed end devices and application. When the unit
configuration does not match the actual end device, the
electric heat may not work properly.

No power to
the controller

If the controller does not have power, electric heat does not
operate. For the controller to operate normally, a 24 Vac
input voltage must be applied. When the green LED is off
continuously, the controller does not have sufficient power
or has failed.

Unit wiring

The wiring between the controller outputs and the electric
heat contacts must be present and correct for normal
electric heat operation. Refer to the typical unit wiring
diagrams (see “Wiring Diagrams,” p. 133).

ECM Motor /
Control Board
Failure

ECM controls include sophisticated fan proving / interlock
circuitry that will disable electric heat if one or more motors
are not performing normally

Hot water is
present on a
changeover
unit

On units with changeover coil and electric heat,
simultaneous operation of hydronic heat and electric heat
is not allowed.

Unit
The controller must be properly configured based on the
configuration actual installed end devices and application. When the unit
configuration does not match the actual end device, the
valves may not work correctly.
No power to If the controller does not have power, the valves do not
the controller operate. For the controller to operate normally, it must have
an input voltage of 24 Vac. When the green LED is off
continuously, the controller does not have sufficient power,
or the controller has failed.
Unit wiring

The wiring between the controller outputs and the valve(s)
must be present and correct for normal valve operation.
Refer to the typical unit wiring diagrams (see “Wiring
Diagrams,” p. 133).

Table 40. Valves stay open (Tracer ZN520)
Probable
Cause

Explanation

Normal
operation

The controller opens and closes the valves to meet the unit
capacity requirements.

The controller can communicate a valve override request to
Valve override
affect the valve operation.

Table 42. Fresh air damper stays open (Tracer ZN520)
Probable
Cause
Normal
operation

Explanation
The controller opens and closes the fresh air damper based
on the controller’s occupancy mode and fan status.
Normally, the fresh air damper is open during occupied mode
when the fan is running and closed during unoccupied mode.

The controller includes a manual output test sequence that
Manual output
verifies analog and binary output operation and the
test
associated wiring. However, based on the current step in the
test sequence, the valves may be open. Refer to “Manual
Output Test (Tracer ZN520),” p. 113.

Manual output The controller includes a manual output test sequence that
test
verifies analog and binary output operation and associated
output wiring. However, based on the current step in the test
sequence, the fresh air damper may not be open. Refer to
“Manual Output Test (Tracer ZN520),” p. 113.

Diagnostic
present

Sampling
logic

A specific list of diagnostics affects valve operation. For more
information, see “Diagnostics,” p. 112.
The controller includes entering water temperature
sampling logic that automatically invokes during 2-pipe or
4-pipe changeover to determine if the entering water
temperature is correct for the unit operating mode. Refer to
“Entering Water Temperature Sampling Function (Tracer
ZN010 and ZN510),” p. 89.

Unit wiring

The wiring between the controller outputs and the fresh air
damper must be present and correct for normal damper
operation. Refer to the typical unit wiring diagrams (see
“Wiring Diagrams,” p. 133).

The controller must be properly configured based on the
Unit
actual installed end devices and application. When the unit
configuration
configuration does not match the actual end device, the
valves may not work correctly.
Unit wiring

114

The wiring between the controller outputs and the valve(s)
must be present and correct for normal valve operation.
Refer to the typical unit wiring diagrams (see “Wiring
Diagrams,” p. 133).

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 115 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics
Table 43. Fresh air damper stays closed (Tracer ZN520)
Probable
Cause

Explanation

Normal
operation

The controller opens and closes the fresh air damper based
on the controller’s occupancy mode and fan status.
Normally, the fresh air damper is open during occupied mode
when the fan is running and closed during unoccupied mode.

Warmup and
cooldown

The controller includes both a warmup and cooldown
sequence to keep the fresh air damper closed during the
transition from unoccupied to occupied. This is an attempt to
bring the space under control as quickly as possible.

Requested
mode: off

It is possible to communicate the operating mode (such as
off, heat, cool) to the controller. When off is communicated
to the controller, the unit closes the fresh air damper.

Manual output The controller includes a manual output test sequence that
test
verifies analog and binary output operation and associated
output wiring. However, based on the current step in the test
sequence, the fresh air damper may not be open. Refer to
“Manual Output Test (Tracer ZN520),” p. 113.
Diagnostic
present

Output Testing and Diagnostics
(UC400)
This section provides information about the following:
•

Output testing

•

Diagnostics

Note: For detailed description of LED activities and
troubleshooting tips, refer to the section.

Output Testing (UC400)
Important:

A specific list of diagnostics effects fresh air damper
operation. For more information, see “Diagnostics,” p. 112.

Unit
The controller must be properly configured based on the
configuration actual installed end devices and application. When the unit
configuration does not match the actual end device, the
damper may not work correctly.
No power to If the controller does not have power, the fresh air damper
the controller does not operate. For the controller to operate normally, a
24 Vac input voltage must be applied. When the green LED
is off continuously, the controller does not have sufficient
power or has failed.
Unit wiring

Do not directly overwrite the outputs.
Output testing can be accomplished by
overriding the following analog and
multistate value points in the desired state
or position:
• Cool valve request
• DX cool request
• Economizer request
• Electric heat request
• Heat valve request
• Supply fan speed request

The points can be overridden on the Tracer TU analog or
multistate pages by clicking on the Override icon
in
the control column. A higher priority (lower number) must
be chosen over the current control setting.

Diagnostics (UC400)
Diagnostics are informational messages that indicate the
operational status of the UC400 controller. In response to
most diagnostics, the controller attempts to protect the
equipment by enabling/disabling, or by opening/closing
specific outputs. Other diagnostics provide information
about the status of the controller, but have no effect on
outputs. Diagnostics are reported in the order in which
they occur. Multiple diagnostics can be present
simultaneously. Diagnostic messages are viewed using
the Tracer TU service tool or through a BAS.
Note: Tracer TU will report only active diagnostics.

Diagnostics Types (UC400)
Diagnostics are categorized according to the type of
clearing method each uses and the type of information
each provides.
The diagnostic types are:
•

Manual (latching) diagnostics

•

Automatic (non-latching) diagnostics

•

Smart reset diagnostics

•

Informational diagnostics

Note: Clearing diagnostics refers to deleting diagnostics
from the software; it does not affect the problem
that generated the message.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

115

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 116 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics
Manual (Latching) Diagnostics (UC400). Manual

Table 44. UC4000 diagnostics (continued)

diagnostics (also referred to as latching) cause the unit to
shut down. Manual diagnostics can be cleared from the
UC400 controller in one of the following ways:

Diagnostic Probable Cause

Consequences

Space
Invalid or missing
temperature value for zone
(a)
failure
temperature.

Automatic
• Discharge air
temperature control
runs
• Unit shuts OFF if both
space temperature
and discharge air
temperature fail

•

By using the Tracer TU service tool to reset latching
diagnostics on the Alarms Status tab or by
temporarily overriding the Reset Diagnostic
Request (bv/2) on the Binary Status tab.

•

Through a building automation system.

•

By cycling power to the controller. When the 24Vac
power to the controller is cycled OFF and then ON
again, a power-up sequence occurs.

Automatic (Non-latching) Diagnostics (UC400).
Automatic diagnostics clear automatically when the
problem that generated the diagnostic is solved.

Smart Reset Diagnostics (UC400). Smart Reset
Diagnostics are latching diagnostics that will auto-recover
if the condition is corrected. After the controller detects the
first smart reset diagnostic, the unit waits 30 minutes
before initiating the smart reset function. If another
diagnostic of this type occurs again within 24 hours after
an automatic clearing, clear the diagnostic manually by
using any of the ways listed under the preceding section,
“Manual (Latching) Diagnostics (UC400).”
Informational Diagnostics (UC400). Informational
diagnostics provide information about the status of the
controller. They do not affect machine operation, but can
be cleared from the controller using the BAS or Tracer SC.

Table of Diagnostics (UC400)
Table 44 lists each diagnostic that can be generated by the
UC400 controller, the diagnostic effect on outputs
(consequences), and diagnostic type.

Entering
water temp
failure

Diagnostic Probable Cause

Consequences

• Fan Unaffected
Filter change Fan run hours
required
exceed the time set • Valves Unaffected
• Electric heat
to indicate filter
Unaffected
change.

Diagnostic
Type

Manual
The drain pan is full • Fan OFF
of water.
• Valves Closed
• Outdoor air damper
Closed
• DX/electric heat OFF

Low coil
temp
detection

Smart reset/
• Fan OFF
The leaving fluid
Manual
temperature may be • Valves Open
• Outdoor air damper
close to freezing.
Closed
• DX/electric heat OFF

Low airflow
supply fan
failure

The fan drive belt,
contactor, or motor
has failed.

116

Automatic

Smart reset/
• Fan OFF
manual
• Valves Open
• Outdoor air damper
Closed
• DX/electric heat OFF

Discharge air Invalid or missing
temp
value for discharge
failure(a)
air temperature.

Automatic
• Simplified zone
control algorithm runs
• Unit shuts OFF if zone
temperature fails

• Fan Unaffected
Outdoor air Invalid or missing
temp failure value for outdoor air • Valved Unaffected
• Outdoor air damper
temperature.
Minimum
Position
• DX cooling/electric
heat unaffected

Automatic

Humidity
Invalid or missing
input failure value for relative
humidity.

• Fan Unaffected
• Valves Unaffected
• Outdoor air damper
Unaffected
• DX cooling/electric
heat Unaffected

Automatic

CO2 sensor
failure

Invalid or missing
value for CO2.

• Fan Unaffected
• Valves Unaffected
• Outdoor air damper
Unaffected
• DX cooling/electric
heat Unaffected

Informational

Generic AIP
failure

Invalid or missing
value for generic
analog input.

• Fan Unaffected
• Valves Unaffected
• Outdoor air damper
Unaffected
• DX cooling/electric
heat Unaffected

Informational

Local fan
Invalid or missing
mode failure fan-speed switch
(reverts to default
fan speed).

• Fan Unaffected
• Valves Unaffected
• Outdoor air damper
Unaffected
• DX cooling/electric
heat Unaffected

Automatic

• Fan Unaffected
• Valves Unaffected
• Outdoor air damper
Unaffected
• DX cooling/electric
heat Unaffected

Automatic

Informational

Condensate
overflow

• Fan Unaffected
(enabled)
• Valves Unaffected
• Outdoor air damper
Unaffected
• DX/electric heat
Unaffected

Discharge air Discharge air
temperature has
temp low
fallen below the
limit
Discharge Air
Temperature Low
Limit.

Note: The generic binary output is unaffected by
diagnostics.
Table 44. UC4000 diagnostics

Invalid or missing
value for zone
temperature.

Diagnostic
Type

Local
setpoint
failure

Invalid or missing
value for zone
temperature
setpoint (reverts to
default setpoint).

(a) For detailed information about zone temperature control methods, refer
to “Zone Temperature Control (UC400),” p. 100.

Manual
• Fan OFF
• Valves Closed
• Outdoor air damper
Closed
• DX/electric heat OFF

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 117 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics

Troubleshooting (Wireless
Controls)

Figure 43. LED, Test button, and symbol locations on
the sensor

Locations of LEDs, Test button, Test Symbols,
and Error Codes
The receiver for all models has four LEDs: LED1, LED2,
LED3, and LED5. Figure 42 shows their locations.
Note: To view LEDs on a flush mount receiver on a fancoil unit, the front panel of the unit must be
removed.
Figure 42. LED locations on the receiver

LED1
LED2
LED3
LED5

Test button

WZS sensor

.
The sensor for model WZS have four LEDs: LED1, LED2,
LED3, and LED5. The sensor for model WDS has test
symbols and error codes that appear on the display. All
three sensor models have a Test button. Figure 43 shows
their locations.

Test symbols
Error code

Test button

WDS sensor

Diagnostics (Wireless Controls)
LED1, LED2, and LED3, located on the sensor of model
WZS respond to diagnostics by exhibiting specific blinking
patterns. View their response by pressing the Test button
(see Table 45, p. 118).

UNT-SVX07D-EN

117

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 118 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics
Error codes appear on the display of the model WDS
sensor when diagnostics occur (see Table 45).
Table 45. Diagnostics on the sensor (wireless controls)
Error code
(WDS
LED state when Test
button is pressed (WZS sensor
display)
Indicates...
sensor)
N/A

E0, E5, E7

Sensor failure
• Replace sensor

LED1: Off
LED2: Off
LED3(a): 1-blink pattern
repeated 3 times

Disassociated
• Sensor is not associated with
a receiver.

LED1: Off
LED2: Off
LED3(a): 2-blink pattern
repeated 3 times

Address set to 000
• Address not set to between
001–999.

LED1: Off
LED2: Off
LED3(a): 3-blink pattern
repeated 3 times

Software error
• Replace sensor

LED1: Off
LED2: Off
LED3(a): 4-blink pattern
repeated 3 times

Input voltage too high
• No RF transmission is
permitted with an input
battery voltage greater than
3.9 V.

Table 47.

Observing signal strength on the sensor
(wireless controls)

Symbol (WDS
sensor
LED state
Indicates...
User action (WZS sensors) display)
LED1: Off
LED2: Off
LED3: Off

No Test symbols Normal state
appear
• No Test button press.

LED1: Off
Press Test
button on the LED2: Off
LED3: Off
sensor

Associated; no
communication with
receiver
• Associated, but no
signal from the
receiver after
pressing Test button.

None

LED1: On
LED2: On
LED3: On
Displays for 5
seconds, then
constantly Off

Excellent signal
strength
• Good signal margin
for reliable
communication.

LED1: Off
LED2: On
LED3: On
Displays for 5
seconds, then
constantly Off

Satisfactory signal
strength
• Adequate signal
strength for reliable
communication.
• Moving sensor or
receiver may improve
signal strength.
• Increased channel
switching may reduce
battery life.

LED1: Off
LED2: Off
LED3: On
Displays for 5
seconds, then
constantly Off

Poor signal strength
• Unreliable
communication.
• Strongly recommend
moving the sensor or
receiver to a better
location.

(a) Blink pattern is On for 1/4 s, Off for 1/4 s, with 2 s Off between repetitions.

LED1, LED2, and LED3, located on the receiver of all
models, respond to diagnostics by exhibiting specific
blinking patterns. They respond independently of any user
action (see Table 46).
Table 46. Diagnostics on the receiver (wireless controls)
LED state

Indicates...

LED1: Off
LED2: Off
LED3: 1-blink pattern
repeated continuously(a)

Disassociated
• Receiver is not associated, waiting for a
sensor.
• Receiver lost communication with sensor.
• Receiver has no devices on its wireless
personal area network.
• Association with a device has been
manually removed.

LED1: Off
LED2: Off
LED3: 2-blink pattern
repeated continuously(a)

Address set to 000
• Address not set to between 001–999.

LED1: Off
LED2: Off
LED3: 3-blink pattern
repeated continuously(a)

Not configured
• Receiver configuration properties not
properly set (defective receiver).

Table 48. Observing signal strength on the receiver
(wireless controls)
User
LED state (receiver, all
action models)

Press
Test
button
on the
sensor

Excellent signal strength
LED1: On
• Good signal margin for reliable
LED2: On
communication.
LED3: On
Displays for 5 seconds, then
constantly Off
Satisfactory signal strength
LED1: Off
• Adequate signal strength for
LED2: On
reliable communication.
LED3: On
Displays for 5 seconds, then • Moving sensor or receiver may
improve signal strength.
constantly Off
• Increased channel switching may
reduce battery life.

Testing Signal Strength (Wireless Controls)

Poor signal strength
LED1: Off
• Unreliable communication
LED2: Off
• Strongly recommend moving the
LED3: On
sensor or receiver to a better
Displays for 5 seconds, then
location
constantly Off

To initiate a signal strength test, push the Test button on
the sensor (see location of Test button in Figure 43, p. 117).
Models WZS: LED1, LED2, and LED3 respond by
indicating signal strength. You can view them on the
sensor (Table 47) and the receiver (Table 48).

•

Model WDS: Test symbols on the sensor display
indicate signal strength (Table 47). LED1, LED2, and
LED3, on the receiver, respond by indicating signal
strength (Table 48).

118

Normal state
• No Test button press.

LED1: Off
LED2: Off
LED3: Off

(a) Blink pattern is On for 1/4 s, Off for 1/4 s, with 2 s Off between repetitions.

•

Indicates...

None

Testing Battery Status (Wireless Controls)
Initiate a battery status test as follows:
•

On model WZS, push the Test button on the sensor (see
location on Figure 43, p. 117). LED5 on the sensor
responds by indicating the level of battery strength, as
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 119 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics
LED3 on model WZS, and on the display on model
WDS (Figure 43, p. 117).

shown in Table 49, p. 119.
•

On model WDS, push the Test button on the sensor
(see location on Figure 43, p. 117). In response, a
battery test symbol appears on the display. The
symbol shown indicates battery life expectancy (see
Table 50).

Table 49. Battery status: LED5 on model WZS sensors
(wireless controls)
User
action LED state (WZS)
Press
Test
button

None

Indicates...

Solid green for 5 seconds Battery is adequate for proper
operation.
Solid red for 5 seconds

25% battery life left. Batteries should
be replaced.

No light

Batteries life expired or not installed
properly, or sensor is defective.

Blinking red: 1-blink
pattern(a) repeated 5
times. Cycle repeats
every 15 minutes.

Approximately 14 days of operation
remain before the battery is too weak
to power the sensor.

For more information on interpreting the LEDs and the
display symbols that indicate signal strength, see “Testing
Signal Strength (Wireless Controls),” p. 118.

Replacing Sensor Batteries (Wireless Controls)
Sensor battery type, length of life, and installation are
addressed in this section.

Battery Type (Wireless Controls)

NOTICE:
Equipment Damage!
The batteries are manufactured in a ready-to-use state.
They are not designed for recharging. Recharging can
cause battery leakage or, in some cases, can cause the
safety release vent to open.

(a) Blink pattern is On for 1/4 s, Off for 3/4 s, with 2 s Off between repetitions.

Table 50. Battery status: Battery symbol on model WDS
sensor display (wireless controls)
User
action

Battery
test
symbol

Press Test
button

Indicates...
Full battery power.

50% battery life left.

NOTICE:
Equipment Damage!
Do not attempt to hook up the sensor to a power
supply. Equipment damage may result.
Use two non-rechargeable 1.5 V lithium AA batteries in the
sensor. To maintain UL rating, use only UL-listed lithium
batteries. The sensor ships with Energizer® L91 batteries
already installed. Replacement batteries are available at
Trane Service Parts Centers (p/n X13770035010) or other
local suppliers.

Battery Life (Wireless Controls)
25% battery life left. Replace batteries.
Flashing symbol indicates that approximately 14
days of operation remain before the battery is too
weak to power the sensor.

Battery life is five years under normal conditions. If the
sensor is not used for an extended period of time, do one
of the following:
•

Set the sensor address to 000 to place the sensor into
a low-power hibernation mode.

24 V Power Status Indicator (Wireless Controls

•

Remove the batteries

LED5 on the receiver of all models (Figure 42, p. 117) lights
and stays constantly On when 24 V power is normal.

Notes:

Using the Wireless Sensor System to Check
Signal Strength on a Site (Wireless Controls)
Follow these steps to check the signal strength on a site:
1. Power up a receiver with a 24 V transformer (user
supplied)

•

If lithium batteries are temporarily unavailable,
alkaline batteries can be used. However, alkaline
battery life is very short by comparison.

•

The battery life for a model WDS may decrease with
extended LCD display activity.

Battery Installation (Wireless Controls)

2. Associate the sensor to a receiver of the same model
intended for the job

WARNING

3. Place the receiver at the desired location

Prevent Injury!

4. Place or hold the sensor at the desired location

Batteries can explode or leak and cause burns if
installed backwards, disassembled, charged, or
exposed to water, fire, or high temperature.

5. Press the Test button (S5) on the sensor and observe
the signal strength as indicated by LED1, LED2, and
UNT-SVX07D-EN

119

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 120 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics
•

The receiver address is changed from its current
setting (001–999)

Prevent Injury!

•

Keep away from small children. If swallowed, contact
your local poison control center immediately.

The receiver receives a disassociation notification
from its associated sensor

•

The receiver does not receive a communication from
its associated sensor within 50 minutes.

6. Observe the polarity indicators that are molded into
the cover.

•

The sensor and receiver are associated and
communicating at the time the sensor is set to 000 and
the Test button is pressed.

WARNING

Install two batteries (of the type specified in “Battery
Type (Wireless Controls),” p. 119) in the battery-holding
slot that is molded into the sensor cover.

The sensor has been designed to prevent damage if the
batteries are installed backwards, to reduce the potential
for injury.

Manual Association (Wireless Controls)
Before attempting manual or automatic association, the
receiver must indicate readiness to associate (one blink
pattern of LED3 on receiver). Refer to “Observing the
Receiver for Readiness to Associate,” p. 78.
At any time, the manual association method can be used
to associate the receiver with the sensor. If an association
was previously established between a receiver and a
sensor and needs to be re-established, the manual
association process may be used. If an association has not
yet been established, the automatic association process is
recommended (see “Associating the Sensor to the
Receiver,” p. 78).
8. Using a small screwdriver, set the three rotary address
switches (Figure 33, p. 77, locations S1, S2, S3) on the
receiver to an address between 001 and 999.

Note: A disassociated sensor will transit an association
request every 10 minutes.

Sensor/Receiver Compatibility (Wireless
Controls)
Version 1.5 (p/n X13790854 and X13790855) and higher
receivers are compatible with all sensors models and
support all functions. Receivers released prior to version
1.5 are compatible with only model WZS.

Replacing a Failed Sensor or Receiver
(Wireless Controls)
Note: Receivers ship installed on the unit. To remove the
receiver, press in the retention tabs on the
underside of the receiver enclosure (see Figure 32,
p. 77) and push upward.
To replace a failed sensor or receiver:
11. Confirm that the device is disassociated (see Table 45
and Table 46, p. 118).
12. Set the rotary address switch of the new device to
match the address of the remaining sensor or receiver.
Note: There is no need to remove power from the
remaining device.

Notes:
• An address can be changed without powering
down the receiver or sensor.
• An address can be changed at any time after initial
association has been established.
9. Set the three rotary address switches (Figure 33, p. 77,
locations S1, S2, S3) on the sensor to the same address
as the receiver.
10. Record the address and location of the receiver and
sensor pair.
• After verifying that the receiver and sensor are
powered up, press the Test button on the sensor to
establish that the signal strength (“Testing Signal
Strength (Wireless Controls),” p. 118) and the
battery life “Testing Battery Status (Wireless
Controls),” p. 118) are adequate for proper
functioning.

13. Apply power to the new device. Association between
the new and the remaining devices will automatically
occur.
Note: When replacing a WDS sensor, the receiver
(version 1.5 or higher) will automatically configure
the sensor to match the last stored configuration, if
the sensor has not been placed into configuration
mode and the factory default configuration is still
valid. If the sensor configuration does not match
the desired system features, it can be manually
configured (see “Manual Association (Wireless
Controls),” p. 120).

Servicing and Testing (Wireless Controls)
If the wireless sensor system is not working as expected,
use the tools and procedure described in this section.

Disassociation (Wireless Controls)

Servicing and Testing Tools (Wireless Controls)

The receiver disassociates from the sensor (by removing
all stored association information), conducts a channel
scan, and restarts itself, if any of the following are true:

No special tools or software are necessary to service and
test the wireless sensor system. Test the system by using:

120

•

The LEDs on the receiver, LEDs on the model WZS
sensor, and the display on the model WDS sensor
UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 121 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics
•

The Test button on the sensor

•

The address test mode on the receiver

•

A common volt-ohm meter

operation and agency requirements per country or region.
The sensor has a default maximum power level of 10 mW,
but the receiver determines the ultimate output power
level of the sensor.

Procedure for Testing the Wireless Sensor System
(Wireless Controls)

Output Values—Failure and Default Modes of
Operation (Wireless Controls)

If the wireless sensor system is not working as expected:

The following table provides output values for failure and
default modes of operation, which can be used for
troubleshooting.

1. Observe LED5 on the receiver. LED5 is On solid green
whenever the receiver is powered.
2. Verify that the receiver is properly grounded. Both the
GND-SIGNAL (black) wire and the GND-POWER
(yellow) wire must be grounded.

Table 51. Output values

3. Press the Test button on the sensor.

Situation

• Model WZS: LED5 should turn On solid green,
indicating proper battery strength. LED1, LED2, and
LED3 will indicate signal strength.
Note: When checking signal strength, both LED1
and LED3 on the receiver and sensor
illuminate in unison if the sensor and
receiver are associated. Use this feature to
confirm association.
• Model WDS: Battery life (“Testing Battery Status
(Wireless Controls),” p. 118) and signal strength
(“Testing Signal Strength (Wireless Controls),”
p. 118) are indicated on the display.

Procedure for Testing the Receiver (Wireless
Controls)
If the receiver is not working as expected:
1. Verify that the receiver is powered.
2. Set the receiver address to 000 to force the zone
temperature output and zone temperature setpoint
output to their default mode values (see “Output
Values—Failure and Default Modes of Operation
(Wireless Controls),” p. 121).
3. Measure the receiver output resistance (see
“Measuring Output Resistance (Wireless Controls),”
p. 121).
4. When the test is complete, reset the receiver address to
its previous setting.
5. Press the Test button on the sensor to force reassociation.
6. Confirm association and communication by noting
LED1, LED2, and LED3 as described in “Testing Signal
Strength (Wireless Controls),” p. 118.

Forcing a Sensor to Transmit (Wireless Controls)
To force a wireless sensor to transmit during servicing,
press the Test button on the sensor.

Output Power Level (Wireless Controls)
The maximum output power level of a wireless sensor set
is controlled by software and restricted by channel of
UNT-SVX07D-EN

Zone
Zone
temperature setpoint
output
output

Receiver address = 000 11.17 kΩ,
72.5°F
(22.5°C),
indefinitely
Receiver address = 001
to 999 and:
Receiver is powered up,
but not is associated, or
Receiver has received a
disassociation request
from the associated
sensor.

11.17 kΩ,
72.5°F
(22.5°C) Hold
for 15 minutes,
then open

Receiver address = 001 Open
to 999 and receiver has
not received a
communication within
35 minutes from the
associated sensor.

Heating
setpoint
output

Fan/
System
output

451 Ω,
72.5°F
(22.5°C),
indefinitely

501 Ω,
70.5°F
(21.4°C),
indefinitely

2320 Ω
Fan =
Auto
System
= Off

451 Ω,
72.5°F
(22.5°C),
Hold for 15
minutes,
then open

501 Ω,
70.5°F
(21.4°C),
indefinitely

2320 Ω
Fan =
Auto
System
= Off

Open

Receiver has no power. Open

Open

Open
Thermistor in sensor
has failed to either open
or close.

Normal
value

N/A

Setpoint potentiometer Normal value
has failed to either open
or close.

Open

N/A

Measuring Output Resistance (Wireless
Controls)
To measure the resistance of receiver outputs for zone
temperature and setpoints for all models, and heating
setpoint and fan/system for the WDS:
1. Ensure that the GND-SIGNAL (black) wire and the
GND-POWER (yellow) wire are grounded to the
transformer.
2. Disconnect the ZONE (white) and SETPOINT (RED)
wires from the controller. Disconnect the HEAT
SETPOINT (brown) and FAN/SYSTEM (green) wires
from the controller, if applicable.
3. Measure resistance as follows:
a. All models: Measure between the grounded GNDSIGNAL (black) wire and either the SETPOINT (red)
or ZONE (white) wire. Compare resistance
measurements to those in Table 52, p. 122.
b. WDS only: Measure between the grounded GNDSIGNAL (black) wire and the FAN/SYSTEM (green)
wire. Compare resistance measurements to those
121

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 122 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics

Troubleshooting (Tracer ZN520)

given in Table 53, p. 122.
Note: The output circuits are not electrically
powered; consequently, resistance can be
measured without risk of damage to the
volt-ohm meter.

Table 52. Receiver resistance table for all models
(wireless controls)

Zone or setpoint
temperature

Nominal setpoint
and heating
Nominal zone
temperature output setpoint output
resistance
resistance

55°F (12.8°C)

17.47 kΩ

792 Ω

60°F (15.6°C)

15.3 kΩ

695 Ω

65°F (18.3°C)

13.49 kΩ

597 Ω

70°F (21.1°C)

11.9 kΩ

500 Ω

75°F (23.9°C)

10.5 kΩ

403 Ω

80°F (26.7°C

9.3 kΩ

305 Ω

85°F (29.4°C)

8.25 kΩ

208 Ω

Table 53. Receiver resistance table for model WDS
(wireless controls)
Fan command

Nominal output resistance

High

16,130 Ω

Med

13,320 Ω

Low

10,770 Ω

Auto

2320 Ω

Off

4870 Ω

Cleaning the Sensor (Wireless Controls)

Green STATUS LED
Indicates Whether the Controller is Powered On (24 Vac Supplied)

Yellow COMM LED
Indicates if Communication is Functioning

Red SERVICE LED
Indicates if Service is Needed

Red SERVICE LED (Tracer ZN520)
During normal operation, the LED is off continuously when
power is applied to the controller.

NOTICE:
Equipment Damage!

If the LED is on continuously, even when power is applied
to the controller means that someone is pressing the
SERVICE button or that the controller has failed.

Spraying glass cleaner or any other solution directly on
the sensor may damage it.

If the LED flashes once every second, use Rover, Trane’s
service tool, to restore the unit to normal operation. Refer
to the Rover product literature for more information.

You can clean the sensor by applying glass cleaner to a
soft, non-abrasive cloth, and gently wiping the face,
including the buttons and LCD display. Use of a premoistened towelette designed for lens or screen cleaning
is also acceptable.
Avoid inadvertent pressing of the Occupied/Unoccupied
buttons on the keypad on the WDS sensor as this may
result in an unwanted timed override or settings change.

Note: If the Service button is held down for more than
15 seconds on the Tracer ZN520 controller, it will
uninstall itself from the ICS communication
network and shut down all unit operation.

Green STATUS LED (Tracer ZN520)
During normal operation, the LED is on continuously.
If the LED blinks once, the controller is in Manual output
test mode.
If the LED blinks twice the controller is in Manual output
test mode, with one or more diagnostics present.
If the LED blinks (1/4 second on, 1/4 second off for 10
seconds) the controller is in the “Wink” mode.
Note: The “wink” feature allows the identification of a
particular controller. When sending a request from
a device, such as Rover, the controller will “wink” to
indicate it received the signal.

122

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 123 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics
If the LED is off, either the power is off, an abnormal
condition is present or the TEST button is pressed.

Yellow COMM LED (Tracer ZN520)
If the LED is off continuously, the controller is not detecting
any communication. This is normal for units in standalone
applications.

hold the TEST button (turning off the green LED) for at least
two seconds.The green LED will begin to blink, indicating
the controller is in test mode.
Table 54. Test sequence for 1-heat/1-cool configurations
(Tracer ZN010, ZN510, and ZN520)
Cool
Output
BOP4(a)

Heat
Output
BOP5

Damper
BOP6

If the LED blinks, the controller detects communication.

Steps

Fan
BOP1-3

If the LED is on continuously, this indicates an abnormal
condition.

1. Off

Off

Closed

2. Fan High

High

Off

Closed

3. Fan Medium

Medium

Off

Closed

4. Fan Low

Low

Off

Closed

5. Cool

High

Off

Closed

6. Heat

High

Off

Closed

7. Fresh Air Damper(b) High

Off

Open

Manual Output Test (Tracer ZN520)
The purpose of the manual output test sequence is to
verify output and end device operation. Use the manual
output test to:
•
•

Verify output wiring and operation without using
Rover, service tool
Force the water valve to open and balance the hydronic
system

Note: The manual output test is not an automatic cycle.
You must press the TEST button to proceed
through each step.
The controller observes all diagnostics that occur during
the test sequence. Although an automatic diagnostic reset
sequence exists as part of the controller’s normal
operation, the automatic diagnostic reset feature is not
active during the test sequence.

8. Exit

(c)

Note: For all 1-heat/1-cool applications including 2-pipe changeover, BOP4
energizes in the cooling test stage and BOP5 energizes in the heat
test stage.This occurs even though during normal 2-pipe changeover
operation BOP4 controls the unit valve for both cooling and heating.
(a) At the beginning of the Fan High step, the controller attempts to clear
all diagnostics.
(b) The fresh air damper (BOP6) only energizes during this step if binary
output 6 has been configured as a fresh air damper.
(c) After the Fresh Air Damper step, the test sequence performs the Exit
step.This initiates a reset and attempts to return the controller to normal
operation.

If left in an individual test step, the controller remains in
test mode for 60 minutes and then exits to normal
operation.
Many service calls are due to unit diagnostics. The test
sequence resets unit diagnostics and attempts to restore
normal unit operation prior to testing the outputs. If the
diagnostics remain after a reset, the STATUS LED indicates
the diagnostic condition is still present (two blinks).

Manual Output Test Procedure (Tracer ZN010,

ZN510, and ZN520)
Follow the procedure below to test the Tracer ZN010,
ZN510, and ZN520 controllers.
1. Press and hold the TEST button for at least two
seconds (not exceeding 5 seconds), and then release,
to start the test mode.
2. The test sequence will turn off all outputs and then
attempt to clear all diagnostics.
3. Press the TEST button several more times (no more
than once per second) to advance through the test
sequence.
The outputs are not subject to minimum times during the
test sequence. However, the test sequence only permits
one step per second which limits minimum output time.
The green LED is turned off when the TEST button is
pressed. To begin the manual output test mode, press and
UNT-SVX07D-EN

123

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 124 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics

Troubleshooting (UC400)
Table 55 through Table 60, p. 125 provide troubleshooting
information if encountering operational problems with the
UC400 controller.
Table 55. Fan does not energize (UC400)
Probable
Cause

Explanation

Unit wiring

The wiring between the controller outputs and the fan
relays and contacts must be present and correct for normal
fan operation. Refer to applicable wiring diagram.

Failed end
device

The fan motor and relay must be checked to ensure proper
operation.

Normal
operation

The fan will turn OFF when:
• The controller receives a communicated off signal
• The fan-speed switch is set to OFF if no communicated
value is present
• Specific diagnostics are generated
• The default fan speed is set to OFF and the fan is
operating in the Auto mode.
If the controller is in unoccupied mode, the fan cycles
between OFF and the highest fan speed.

No power to
the controller

If the controller does not have power, the unit fan does not
operate. For the controller to operate normally, it must
have an input voltage of 24 Vac. If the Marquee/Power LED
is OFF continuously, the controller does not have sufficient
power or has failed.

Diagnostic
present

Several diagnostics affect fan operation. For detailed
information about these diagnostics, refer to Table 44,
p. 116.

Unit
configuration

The controller must be properly configured based on the
actual installed end devices and application. If the unit
configuration does not match the actual end device, the
fans may not work correctly.

Random start
observed

After power-up, the controller always observes a random
start from 5 to 30 seconds. The controller remains OFF
until the random start time expires.

Cycling fan
operation/
continuous

The controller continuously operates the fan when in the
occupied, occupied standby, or occupied bypass mode.
When the controller is in the unoccupied mode, the fan is
cycled between high speed and OFF with capacity.

Unoccupied
operation

Even if the controller is configured for continuous fan
operation, the fan normally cycles with capacity during
unoccupied mode. While unoccupied, the fan cycles ON or
OFF with heating/cooling to provide varying amounts of
heating or cooling to the space.

Fan mode off

If a local fan mode switch determines the fan operation, the
OFF position controls the fan to off.

Requested
mode off

The user can communicate a desired operating mode (such
as OFF, heat, and cool) to the controller. If OFF is
communicated to the controller, the unit controls the fan to
off. There is no heating or cooling.

Table 56. Valves remain closed (UC400)
Probable
Cause

Probable
Cause

Explanation

Normal
operation

The controller opens and closes the valves to meet the unit
capacity requirements.

Unit
configuration

The controller must be properly configured based on the
actual installed end devices and application. If the unit
configuration does not match the actual end device, the
valves may not work correctly.

Random start
observed

After power-up, the controller always observes a random
start from 5 to 30 seconds. The controller remains OFF
until the random start time expires.

Requested
mode off

Entering water The controller includes entering water temperature
sampling logic, which is automatically initiated during
temperature
sampling logic 2-pipe and 4-pipe changeover, if the entering water
temperature is either too cool or too hot for the desired
heating or cooling.
Valve
configuration

Table 57.
Probable
Cause

Ensure the valves are correctly configured, using the Tracer
TU service tool, as normally open or normally closed as
dictated by the application.

Valves remain open (UC400)
Explanation

Unit wiring

The wiring between the controller outputs and the valve(s)
must be present and correct for normal valve operation.
Refer to applicable wiring diagram.

Failed end
device

The valves must be checked to ensure proper operations.

Normal
operation

The controller opens and closes the valves to meet the unit
capacity requirements.

Diagnostic
present

Several diagnostics affect valve operation. For detailed
information about these diagnostics, refer to Table 44,
p. 116.

Unit
configuration

Entering water The controller includes entering water temperature
sampling logic, which is automatically initiated during 2temperature
sampling logic pipe and 4-pipe changeover, if the entering water
temperature is either too cool or too hot for the desired
heating or cooling.
Valve
configuration

Ensure the valves are correctly configured, using the Tracer
TU service tool, as normally open (NO) or normally closed
(NC) as dictated by the application.

Freeze
avoidance

When the fan is OFF with no demand for capacity (0%),
and the outdoor air temperature is below the freeze
avoidance setpoint, the controller opens the water valves
(100%) to prevent coil freezing. This includes unoccupied
mode when there is no call for capacity or any other time
the fan is OFF.

Explanation

Unit wiring

The wiring between the controller outputs and the valve(s)
must be present and correct for normal valve operation.
Refer to applicable wiring diagram.

Failed end
device

The valves must be checked to ensure proper operation.

No power to
the controller

If the controller does not have power, the unit valve(s) will
not operate. For the controller to operate normally, apply
an input voltage of 24 Vac. If the Marquee/Power LED is
OFF continuously, the controller does not have sufficient
power or has failed.

Diagnostic
present

Several diagnostics affect valve operation. For detailed
information about these diagnostics, refer to Table 44,
p. 116.

124

Table 56. Valves remain closed (UC400) (continued)

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 125 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics
Table 58. DX or electric heat does not energize (UC400)

Table 60. Outdoor air damper remains open

Probable
Cause

Explanation

Unit wiring

The wiring between the controller outputs and the end
devices must be present and correct for normal operation.
Refer to applicable wiring diagram.

Unit wiring

The wiring between the controller outputs and the outdoor
air damper must be present and correct for normal outdoor
air damper operation. Refer to applicable wiring diagram.

Failed end
device

Check the control contactors or the electric heat element,
including any auxiliary safety interlocks, to ensure proper
operation.

Failed end
device

Check damper actuator to ensure proper operation.

No power to
the controller

If the controller does not have power, heat outputs do not
operate. For the controller to operate normally, apply an
input voltage of 24 Vac. If the Marquee/Power LED is OFF
continuously, the controller does not have sufficient power
or has failed.

Normal
operation

The controller opens and closes the outdoor air damper
based on the controller occupancy mode and fan status.
Normally, the outdoor air damper is open during occupied
mode when the fan is running and closed during
unoccupied mode. (Refer to the section, “Modulating
Outdoor/Return Air Damper (UC400),” p. 102.)

Diagnostic
present

Several diagnostics affect DX and electric heat operation.
For detailed information about these diagnostics, refer to
Table 44, p. 116.

Unit
configuration

Normal
operation

The controller controls compressor or electric heat outputs
as needed to meet the unit capacity requirements.

The controller must be properly configured based on the
actual installed end devices and application. If the unit
configuration does not match the actual end device, the
outdoor air damper may not work correctly.

Unit
configuration

The controller must be properly configured based on the
actual installed end devices and application. If the unit
configuration does not match the actual end device, DX or
electric heat may not operate correctly.

Requested
mode off

The user can communicate a desired operating mode (such
as OFF, heat, and cool) to the controller. If OFF is
communicated to the controller, the unit shuts off the
compressor or electric heat.

Freeze
avoidance

When the fan is OFF with no demand for capacity (0%),
and the outdoor air temperature is below the freeze
avoidance setpoint, the controller disables compressors
and electric heat outputs (100%) to prevent coil freezing.
This includes unoccupied mode when there is no call for
capacity or any other time the fan is OFF.

Table 59. Outdoor air damper remains closed (UC400)
Probable
Cause

Explanation

Unit wiring

The wiring between the controller outputs and the outdoor
air damper must be present and correct for normal outdoor
air damper operation. Refer to applicable wiring diagram.

Failed end
device

Check damper actuator to ensure proper operation.

No power to
the controller

If the controller does not have power, the outdoor air
damper does not operate. For the controller to operate
normally, apply an input voltage of 24 Vac. If the Marquee/
Power LED is OFF continuously, the controller does not
have sufficient power or has failed.

Diagnostic
present

Several diagnostics affect outdoor air damper operation.
For detailed information about these diagnostics, refer to
Table 44, p. 116.

Normal
operation

The controller opens and closes the outdoor air damper
based on the controller’s occupancy mode and fan status.
Normally, the outdoor air damper is open during occupied
mode when the fan is running and closed during
unoccupied mode.

Unit
configuration

Warm-up and
cool-down
sequence

The controller includes both a morning warm-up and cooldown sequence to keep the outdoor air damper closed
during the transition from unoccupied to occupied. This is
an attempt to bring the space under control as quickly as
possible.

Requested
mode off

The user can communicate a desired operating mode (such
as OFF, heat, or cool) to the controller. If OFF is
communicated to the controller, the unit closes the outdoor
air damper.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

125

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 126 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics

Troubleshooting (ECM)
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote
disconnects and discharge all motor start/run
capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/
tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be
inadvertently energized. For variable frequency drives
or other energy storing components provided by Trane
or others, refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s
literature for allowable waiting periods for discharge of
capacitors. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all
capacitors have discharged. Failure to disconnect
power and discharge capacitors before servicing could
result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

input 1 on the Tracer ZN controller (polarity
sensitivity).
•

General Information (ECM)
The ECM engine oversees and monitors all motor
operations and changes to speed resulting from:
•

•

Direct Fan Speed Requests
– Customer Fan Speed Switches
– Thermostat Fan Speed, On or 0–10V requests
– Automatic Fan Request from Tracer ZN / UC
controllers

•

Indirect Fan Speed Requests
– Electric Heat requests will bring the fan to the
proper speed.

Safety Alert!
You MUST follow all recommendations below. Failure
to do so could result in death or serious injury.

The mini-access lid on the front of the main control
panel lid has the ECM engine troubleshooting/setup
guide affixed to the back of the lid. This guide is unitspecific and should be consulted before determining
the disposition of a unit.

•

Conflicting Fan Speed Requests
– If two or more commands are received (direct or
indirect), the fan will honor the higher speed
requested.

Note: In some cases, indirect requests will result in fan
behavior change regardless of whether the enddevice fails to actuate (due to device failure, or
safety/down-stream lockouts).

The ECM engine board also coordinates the operation of
Electric Heat, Electric/Hydronic Heat lockouts, and CSTI
Changeover coil operation.

Initial hookups to the CSTI and standard adapter
boards, including low voltage interconnections,
must be made with the power off.

General system troubleshooting tips (ECM)

Do not make connections to the motors or the
adapter boards while power is ON. Do not remove
connections to the motor or the adapter boards while
the power is ON.

Troubleshooting Information (ECM)
•

ECM engine configuration must perfectly match the
factory-supplied ECM.
– Refer to “ECM Overview and Setup,” p. 53 for
troubleshooting configuration of the engine board.

•

The ECM engine will display troubleshooting
information, and contains dual tachometers to aid in
performance verification.

Notes:
•

The new Trane BLDC system is a closed loop system
that has equipment protections and envelope
enforcements. Do not assume that the motor has failed
without first consulting the ECM engine status/
diagnostics screen. In many cases, the engine shuts
down the motor operation and locks it out to prevent
equipment damage.

•

Under normal circumstances, the ECM engine display
will display the operational status of the motors and
electric heat circuit/sensors, however, a malfunction
will drive a priority display mode that will present the
error code instantly to the screen. The error must be
cleared by solving by powering down, removing the
cause of the problem and restarting the engine board.

•

Electric Heat operation and Changeover Coil control on
CSTI units are co-coordinated by the ECM engine
board. Changeover function on Tracer ZN units can
also be affected by incorrect configuration of the ECM
engine or improper wiring of terminals to analog

•

Engine Label setup document (affixed to the back of the
low voltage access lid) should be used to verify engine
configuration settings.

•

For proper operation of the system, all plugs must be
firmly seated in all boards and motors. Insecure

126

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 127 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics
connections will cause malfunction and the system
will shutdown.
•

•

Do not unplug or plug-in motors or connectors while
the system is receiving a speed request of any kind.
The system must be powered down before plugging or
un-plugging connections to the adapter boards,
engine boards or motors. Failure do so will register
diagnostics or cause unsafe operation and reduction in
the contact life of the connectors.

Speeds below 450 rpm are not supported on fancoil units.
3. VSP Inputs (0–10V inputs) are of the wrong polarity
– Verify that variable speed (VSP) inputs are properly
wired to 1TB4.
Notes:
• Do not short the courtesy 10 Vdc supply to chassis
or loads that require greater than 10 mA of DC
current.

The motor will not spin if plugged in while the ECM
engine is requesting power.

• Please observe proper polarity of 0–10 Vdc inputs.
Failure to observe proper polarity can cause failure
of the ECM engine board, the customer-supplied
controller or the Tracer ZN controller.

Troubleshooting a motor that does not spin,
or spins too slowly (ECM)
The motor connections and motor plug connections to the
adapter boards should be secure. Unit should be powered
off to check the fit of the connectors.

4. Customer Controller output signal to VSP Inputs are
too low.
Note: If the customer supplied controller outputs
signals that are below the noise threshold, they
will be ignored by the ECM Engine.

When configured correctly, the system will always
respond positively to direct, indirect, and conflicting speed
requests with very few exceptions:

– The ECM Engine board contains an adjustable
noise floor parameter,  that can be configured
to reject signals below the noise floor.

These exceptions are:
1. If a motor has been locked out due to engine locked
rotor protection:

– If the noise floor parameter is set too high, it can be
lowered as long as there are acceptable noise levels
on the inputs lines.

– Assuming Motor 1 has an obstruction. In this case,
the “Status Display” will be interrupted to display:

→→

Solution:
i. Remove obstruction from the fan wheel.
ii. Ensure that motor plugs and all plugs to adapter
boards and the ECM engine board are secure
iii. Verify that the configuration does not specify a
motor that is physically missing. Most units
require only one motor. The controller is made
aware of the missing motor by specifying all
speeds related to Motor 2 to 0 rpm.
iv. Verify that  and , the low motor
signal output limits, are set correctly.
2. If a motor has been locked out due to overspeed or
runaway condition:
– Assuming Motor 1 has an overspeed condition. In
this case, the “Status Display” will be interrupted to
display:

→→

Troubleshooting a motor that spins too fast, or
spins without any apparent speed request
(ECM)
Typical equipment and controls design practice will
ensure that the fans will come on if there is a call for heat,
cool, or ventilation. In most cases, we will depend on the
controller/thermostat to call for the fan to come on when
appropriate, but during calls for electric heat, or calls for
heat on CSTI units equipped with electric heat, as a call for
the appropriate fan speed. This behavior, as described
previously, is an indirect request.
When a call for electric heat is made, the system will
positively drive the fan on to the correct speed, regardless
of whether the controller has asked for fan operation or
not. The unit design incorporates an interlock instead of a
lock-out. (It does not lock out electric heat if the fan is set
to off; it brings the fan on.)
Notes:
•

In many cases, indirect requests will result in fan
behavior change regardless of whether the end-device
fails to actuate (due to device failure, or safety/downstream lockouts). If there is hot water available on CSTI
units with changeover coils and electric heat, we will
still drive the fan to the appropriate electric heat speed.

•

The new fan coil designs incorporate sophisticated fan
interlocks that will lockout heat if there is a fan failure.

Solution:
i. Ensure that set-screw is attached firmly to the
motor shaft.
ii. Ensure that motor plugs and all plugs to adapter
boards and the ECM engine board are secure.
iii. Verify that the configuration does not specify a
speed lower than 450 rpm for the affected motor.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

If the preceding conditions do not describe the behavior of
the unit, the following checks should be performed:
127

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 128 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Diagnostics
•

Verify that the voltage jumper on the motor plug
harness is absent for 208-230V units and 277V units. If
the jumper is present for these units, the motor
electronics will be damaged, and the motor will not be
controllable.

•

Verify that the fan speed request is not below 450 rpm.
Speeds below 450 rpm are not supported on the fancoil product.

•

Verify that the all binary inputs to the customer
terminal blocks are of proper and consistent polarity.
– For CSTI units, the fan inputs and end device inputs
on TB3 must receive signals that are 24 Vac with
respect to the unit chassis.
Note: Do not short 24 Vac (pos 1 or pos 2) to
chassis; refer to the unit schematic.
– For Fan Speed Switch units, that incorporate the
Tracer ZN/CSTI adapter board, all inputs to TB3
must be 24 Vac with respect to unit chassis.
Note: Do not short 24 Vac (pos 1 or pos 2) to
chassis; refer to the unit schematic.
– For Tracer ZN units, where there is a desire to use
parallel fan inputs on the adapter board TB3 strip,
the inputs must be COM (i.e., the inputs will honor
only 0 V with respect to unit chassis).
Note: Do not short 24 Vac (pos 1 or pos 2) to
chassis; refer to the unit schematic.

•

Verify that variable speed (VSP) inputs are properly
wired to 1TB4.
Notes:
• Do not short the courtesy 10 Vdc supply to chassis
or loads that require greater than 10 mA of DC
current.
• Please observe proper polarity of 0–10 Vdc inputs.
Failure to observe proper polarity can cause failure
of the ECM Engine board, the customer-supplied
controller or the Tracer ZN controller.

•

Verify that the signal on the VSP inputs is noise free.
The ECM engine board contains an adjustable noise
floor parameter, , that can be configured to reject
signals below the noise floor.
Note: If the customer supplied controller outputs
signals that are below the noise threshold, they
will be ignored by the ECM engine.

•

Verify that VSP input settings are correct. The ECM
engine board contains an adjustable digital amplifier,
, to compensate for long 10 Vdc cable runs. For
normalized (0–10 Vdc) signals, this setting should be
set to 1.000. If it is set too high, the motors will faster
than the requested ratio, and will hit the limit 
before the input voltage has reached its upper limit.

•

Verify that  and , the low motor signal
output limits, are set correctly.

128

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 129 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Replacing ECM Components
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote
disconnects and discharge all motor start/run
capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/
tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be
inadvertently energized. For variable frequency drives
or other energy storing components provided by Trane
or others, refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s
literature for allowable waiting periods for discharge of
capacitors. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all
capacitors have discharged. Failure to disconnect
power and discharge capacitors before servicing could
result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Safety Alert!
You MUST follow all recommendations below. Failure
to do so could result in death or serious injury.
•

•

Initial hookups to the CSTI and standard adapter
board, including low voltage interconnections, must
be made with the power off.

•

Do not make connections to the motors or the
adapter boards while power is ON. Do not remove
connections to the motor or the adapter boards while
the power is ON.

•

Caution should be taken to stay clear of hazardous
voltages, moving parts and electric heat elements
while making adjustments to the ECM engine board.
If it is not practical to stay clear of these areas during
adjustment of the ECM engine board, please contact
Trane Global Parts for configuration kit that allows
easy powering of the engine board outside of the unit
with a 9V battery.

•

For safe operation, it is necessary to configure
replacement boards to match the setup/switch
configuration of the previously installed boards.

•

Ensure that new circuit modules are firmly seated on
the nylon standoffs, and that the nylon standoffs are
firmly seated on the metal panel.

NOTICE:
Equipment Damage!
The motor harness attached to the single plug to which
the motor mates contains the very important 115V
motor voltage jumper; the motor harness should
always be present for 115V units and should not be
modified or substituted. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in equipment damage.
Notes:
•

UNT-SVX07D-EN

Ensure that drip-loops are maintained on wiring on
pipe end of unit to avoid wicking of water into the unit.

129

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 130 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Replacing ECM Components
•

Before assuming that any of the boards or components
in the new system have failed, please ensure that the
ECM engine board has been configured correctly and
that the switches on the CSTI board (where applicable)
are set correctly.

•

It is necessary to configure the service replacement
ECM engine board before commissioning the unit. The
ECM engine board is pre-configured with safe values,
but will NOT work correctly unless properly
configured.

•

Only genuine Trane® replacement components with
identical Trane part numbers should be used.

•

Unit fan assemblies contain concealed wires that
should be removed before the fan-board is removed,
to avoid nicking the wire.

•

Care should be maintained to retain the order of the
motors with respect to the motor plugs. On a unit with
two motors, the double-shafted motor will always be
to the left side, and will be designated as Motor 2 by the
controller.

Tips:
•

Ensure that motor nameplate voltage is the same as
unit voltage (for 3-phase/ 4-wire units with Neutral,
motor voltage will be L-N, not L1-L2).

•

Ensure that motor harness is correct (harness will have
jumper installed for 115V units only).

•

Ensure that configuration on ECM Engine matches the
affixed label.

•

Maintain correct plug/motor association. The plugs
will have the motor number and shaft configuration
printed on an affixed label.

•

Ensure that configuration of switches on CSTI adapter
board matches depiction of switches on the unit
schematic.

•

Ensure that all wires are plugged in securely.

•

Ensure that edge protection on sharp edges,
grommets, and wire management devices are
maintained when replacing components.

•

Ensure that blunt-tip screws are used when in the
proximity of wire harnesses.

Circuit Modules Replacement Notes/Work
Instructions
1. Circuit modules are equipped with nylon standoffs
which can either be removed by squeezing the barbs at
the rear of the control panel, or squeezing the latch
above the circuit module. If the latter method is chosen,
the standoffs will be retained on the metal panel. The
new standoffs (affixed to the replacement modules)

130

can be removed if necessary, so the new module circuit
board can be attached to the retained standoffs.
Figure 44.

Depress latch to
remove PCB, leaving
standoff attached to
the metal panel.
2. If replacing the ECM engine module, special care
should be taken to avoid electro-static discharge
damage. Please use an ESD protection wrist-strap and
frequently touch a grounded surface (with unit power
off) to discharge any static buildup.
3. Replace connectors carefully onto the appropriate
board. For units with a green wire attached to the CSTI
or standard adapter boards, please ensure that the
green wire is attached to the engine board white
connector as shown in Figure 45.
Figure 45.

Green wire attached to
white plug on blue ECM
engine board, and to
quick-connect terminal
on the adapter board.

4. Ensure that the new ECM engine controller is
configured to match the ECM engine configuration
label that is present on the unit. It is necessary to
configure the ECM engine board to avoid improper
operation of the unit, discomfort to the end user, and
loud fan operation.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 131 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Replacing ECM Components
5. Ensure that the CSTI adapter board switches are set
correctly, as indicated on the attached unit schematic
(where applicable).
Figure 46.

6. After replacing modules, commission the unit by
performing at a minimum, “Fan Speed Response
Verification,” p. 72.

UNT-SVX07D-EN

131

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 132 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

ECM Application Notes
The new Trane BLDC system has some notable differences
to traditional designs.

perform the function of a two 3-pole contactors.
Figure 47.

Sample arrangement: electric heat relay

RPM Mode
The motors are programmed from the factory to run in
rpm mode and will not change rpm based on external
static pressure, except at the performance limits of the
motor/controller. For ducted units, the units are shipped
with the rpm set for 0.2” ESP for High, Medium, and Low
speeds. The speeds can for high, medium, and low
operation, but should not be changed for the electric heat
actuation speeds.

Troubleshooting Other Unit Functions

Generally, the fans deliver less cfm for the same rpm, if the
static is increased and the power will decrease. The fan will
deliver more cfm for the same rpm, if the static is
decreased and the fan power will increase. A unit with high
static configuration should not be used to free-deliver air
(i.e., with no ducting attached).

In some cases, the normal or abnormal operation of the
BLDC system may interact with other components in the
system. Generally, verification of the engine and adapter
boards’ wiring and configuration should be checked if
there are unexplained abnormalities in other areas of the
unit:

Field Power Wiring

1. Valve operation

Note: This product uses an electronic variable speed
motor control, which includes a line reactor to
minimize power line harmonic currents. It is
recommended that good wiring practices be
followed to manage building electrical power
system harmonic voltages and currents to avoid
electrical system problems or other equipment
interaction.

Performance Boundaries
While the speeds of the fan motors can be adjusted, never
program a fan speed higher than 1700 rpm, or lower than
450 rpm. In many cases, units configured for high-static
operation will not achieve the desired rpm if the ESP of the
unit is too low, or the unit is allowed to “free-discharge.”
The ECM engine contains settings that will limit the output
power of the motor under these overload conditions. If the
motors cannot achieve rpm close to the target for a specific
period of time, the unit will disable electric heat and fanstatus indicators.

2. Electric Heat operation
3. Changeover sensor operation
4. Damper operation
5. Condensate overflow switch
A high degree of protection is provided on electric heat
units. If electric heat fails to actuate, it may be because of
one of the following events:
1. Fans are failing to meet target speed. If a second motor
is not present, all settings for speeds for Motor 2
should be set to 0000.
2. Hot water may be available in the changeover coil.
3. The connection to analogue input 1 on the Tracer ZN
controller may be reversed in polarity.
4. Target speeds for motors may be set too high:
a. The  parameter may be set incorrectly.
b. The  parameter may be set incorrectly.

MCA/MFS and Power Draw
The Trane BLDC motors have variable output but are
shipped at specific settings to deliver proper performance
and reliability. The power draw indicated in the catalogue
indicates the power consumed when applied properly (as
shipped and with the nominal ESP applied). However, the
nameplate of the unit indicates the maximum input draw
of the motor, as the motor settings can be changed to draw
more power.

Electric Heat Relays
For quiet operation, the new BLDC units employ power
relays instead of definite purpose contactors for electric
heat actuation. The coils of multiple relays are hooked in
parallel to simulate a multi-pole contactor, as shown in
Figure 47. In Figure 47, two sets of three relays are used to
132

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 133 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wiring Diagrams
Figure 48. Unit-mounted fan speed switch with factory-mounted disconnect

UNT-SVX07D-EN

133

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 134 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wiring Diagrams
Figure 49. Tracer ZN 520 unit with two-stage electric heat and unit-mounted zone sensor

134

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 135 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wiring Diagrams
Figure 50. CSTI unit with single-stage electric heat and unit-mounted fan switch (Note: CSTI configuration switches)

UNT-SVX07D-EN

135

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 136 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wiring Diagrams
Figure 51.

136

Tracer ZN520 unit with four-pipe configuration, condensate overflow switch and wall-mounted zone sensor

UNT-SVX07D-EN

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 137 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Wiring Diagrams
Figure 52. Tracer ZN510 unit with four-pipe configuration and split zone sensor/unit fan switch configuration

UNT-SVX07D-EN

137

UNT-SVX07_-EN.book Page 138 Friday, April 27, 2012 9:40 AM

Trane optimizes the performance of homes and buildings around the world. A business of Ingersoll Rand, the
leader in creating and sustaining safe, comfortable and energy efficient environments, Trane offers a broad
portfolio of advanced controls and HVAC systems, comprehensive building services, and parts.
For more information, visit www.Trane.com.
Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice.
© 2012 Trane All rights reserved
UNT-SVX07D-EN 27 Apr 2012

We are committed to using environmentally

Supersedes UNT-SVX07C-EN (01 Nov 2011)

conscious print practices that reduce waste.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Gayle C. Edlin, Senior Technical Writer - TCS Literature
Title                           : UNT-SVX07D-EN (27 Apr 2012): UniTrane Fan-Coil and Force-Flo Air Conditioners 200 to 1,200 cfm - Installation, Operation, and Maintenance
Description                     : Installation, operation, and maintenance manual for UniTrane fan-coil and Force-Flo air conditioners.
Rights                          : © 2012 Trane  All rights reserved.
Subject                         : FC, FF, UniTrane, Force-Flo, fan-coil
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 10.0.2
Modify Date                     : 2012:04:27 10:12:54-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2012:04:27 10:12:54-05:00
Create Date                     : 2011:11:01 12:48:38-05:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.3 (Windows)
Keywords                        : FC; FF; UniTrane; Force-Flo; fan-coil
Acces flag                      : F
Bw color                        : B
Date published                  : 11/01/2011
Dept id                         : 29
Topic focused id                : TRANE|EN
Price                           : 0
Cur flag                        : T
Lit class id                    : SV
Lit length                      : 173
Lit order nbr                   : UNT-SVX07C-EN
Lit type id                     : SVX
Media id                        : PPI
Model                           : FCAB
Prod class                      : TD
Prod family id                  : 61
Prod                            : UNT
Topic related id                : TRN-FLD|STARTUP|SERVICER|SERV|OPER|INST|BLD-OPER
Restrct flag                    : F
Source date                     : nulldate
Stocking loc id                 : LAXCPY
Supceded by date                : nulldate
Unit flag                       : T
Branding                        : Trane
Lol language                    : EN
Object id                       : 090102b182a28317
Object name                     : UNT-SVX07C-EN_11012011
Chronicle id                    : 090102b180081dd0
Filename                        : 82a28317.pdf
Abstract                        :  SUBMITTAL - Models FC and FF 'ZO' and later design sequence Low vertical models FCKB and FCLB 'SO' and later design sequence
Hist model                      : FCAB|FCBB|FCCB|FCDB|FCEB|FCHB|FCJB|FCKB|FCLB|FCMB|FCNB|FFAB|FFAB020|FFAB030|FFAB040|FFAB060|FFAB080|FFAB100|FFAB120|FFBB|FFBB020|FFBB040|FFBB060|FFBB030|FFBB080|FFBB100|FFBB120|FFCB|FFCB020|FFCB030|FFCB040|FFCB060|FFCB080|FFCB100|FFCB120|FFCB|FFCB020|FFCB030|FFCB040|FFCB060|FFCB080|FFCB100|FFCB120|FFDB|FFDB020|FFDB030|FFDB040|FFDB060|FFDB080|FFDB100|FFDB120|FFEB020|FFEB|FFEB030|FFEB040|FFEB060|FFEB080|FFEB100|FFEB120|FFHB|FFHB020|FFHB030|FFHB040|FFHB060|FFHB080|FFHB100|FFHB120|FFJB|FFJB020|FFJB030|FFJB040|FFJB060|FFJB080|FFJB100|FFJB120|FFKB|FFKB020|FFKB030|FFKB040|FFKB060|FFKB080|FFKB100|FFKB120|FFLB|FFLB020|FFLB030|FFLB040|FFLB060|FFLB080|FFLB100|FFLB120|FFMB|FFMB020|FFMB030|FFMB040|FFMB060|FFMB080|FFMB100|FFMB120|FFNB|FFNB020|FFNB030|FFNB040|FFNB060|FFNB080|FFNB100|FFNB120|FCAB020|FCAB030|FCAB040|FCAB060|FCAB080|FCAB100|FCAB120|FCBB020|FCBB030|FCBB040|FCBB060|FCBB080|FCBB100|FCBB120|FCCB020|FCCB030|FCCB040|FCCB060|FCCB080|FCCB100|FCCB120|FCDB020|FCDB030|FCDB040|FCDB060|FCDB080|FCDB100|FCDB120|FCEB020|FCEB030|FCEB040|FCEB060|FCEB080|FCEB100|FCEB120|FCHB020|FCHB030|FCHB040|FCHB060|FCHB080|FCHB100|FCHB120|FCJB020|FCJB030|FCJB040|FCJB060|FCJB080|FCJB100|FCJB120|FCKB020|FCKB030|FCKB040|FCKB060|FCKB080|FCKB100|FCKB120|FCLB020|FCLB030|FCLB040|FCLB060|FCLB080|FCLB100|FCLB120|FCMB020|FCMB030|FCMB040|FCMB060|FCMB080|FCMB100|FCMB120|FCNB020|FCNB030|FCNB040|FCNB060|FCNB080|FCNB100|FCNB120|FCPB|FCPB020|FCPB030|FCPB040|FCPB060|FCPB080|FCPB100|FCPB120|FFPB|FFPB020|FFPB030|FFPB060|FFPB040|FFPB080|FFPB100|FFPB120
Document ID                     : uuid:b8a50f22-90c6-48a8-90d8-3f4327622422
Instance ID                     : uuid:265f43b2-452e-415d-be1f-cc7626c0d38e
Startup Profile                 : Print
Marked                          : True
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 138
Author                          : Gayle C. Edlin
Acces Flag                      : F
Bw Color                        : B
Chronicle Id                    : 090102b180081dd0
Cur Flag                        : T
Date Published                  : 11/01/2011
Dept Id                         : 29
Hist Model                      : FCAB|FCBB|FCCB|FCDB|FCEB|FCHB|FCJB|FCKB|FCLB|FCMB|FCNB|FFAB|FFAB020|FFAB030|FFAB040|FFAB060|FFAB080|FFAB100|FFAB120|FFBB|FFBB020|FFBB040|FFBB060|FFBB030|FFBB080|FFBB100|FFBB120|FFCB|FFCB020|FFCB030|FFCB040|FFCB060|FFCB080|FFCB100|FFCB120|FFCB|FFCB020|FFCB030|FFCB040|FFCB060|FFCB080|FFCB100|FFCB120|FFDB|FFDB020|FFDB030|FFDB040|FFDB060|FFDB080|FFDB100|FFDB120|FFEB020|FFEB|FFEB030|FFEB040|FFEB060|FFEB080|FFEB100|FFEB120|FFHB|FFHB020|FFHB030|FFHB040|FFHB060|FFHB080|FFHB100|FFHB120|FFJB|FFJB020|FFJB030|FFJB040|FFJB060|FFJB080|FFJB100|FFJB120|FFKB|FFKB020|FFKB030|FFKB040|FFKB060|FFKB080|FFKB100|FFKB120|FFLB|FFLB020|FFLB030|FFLB040|FFLB060|FFLB080|FFLB100|FFLB120|FFMB|FFMB020|FFMB030|FFMB040|FFMB060|FFMB080|FFMB100|FFMB120|FFNB|FFNB020|FFNB030|FFNB040|FFNB060|FFNB080|FFNB100|FFNB120|FCAB020|FCAB030|FCAB040|FCAB060|FCAB080|FCAB100|FCAB120|FCBB020|FCBB030|FCBB040|FCBB060|FCBB080|FCBB100|FCBB120|FCCB020|FCCB030|FCCB040|FCCB060|FCCB080|FCCB100|FCCB120|FCDB020|FCDB030|FCDB040|FCDB060|FCDB080|FCDB100|FCDB120|FCEB020|FCEB030|FCEB040|FCEB060|FCEB080|FCEB100|FCEB120|FCHB020|FCHB030|FCHB040|FCHB060|FCHB080|FCHB100|FCHB120|FCJB020|FCJB030|FCJB040|FCJB060|FCJB080|FCJB100|FCJB120|FCKB020|FCKB030|FCKB040|FCKB060|FCKB080|FCKB100|FCKB120|FCLB020|FCLB030|FCLB040|FCLB060|FCLB080|FCLB100|FCLB120|FCMB020|FCMB030|FCMB040|FCMB060|FCMB080|FCMB100|FCMB120|FCNB020|FCNB030|FCNB040|FCNB060|FCNB080|FCNB100|FCNB120|FCPB|FCPB020|FCPB030|FCPB040|FCPB060|FCPB080|FCPB100|FCPB120|FFPB|FFPB020|FFPB030|FFPB060|FFPB040|FFPB080|FFPB100|FFPB120
Lit Class Id                    : SV
Lit Length                      : 173
Lit Order Nbr                   : UNT-SVX07C-EN
Lit Type Id                     : SVX
Lol Language                    : EN
Media Id                        : PPI
Object Id                       : 090102b182a28317
Object Name                     : UNT-SVX07C-EN_11012011
Prod Class                      : TD
Prod Family Id                  : 61
Restrct Flag                    : F
Source Date                     : nulldate
Stocking Loc Id                 : LAXCPY
Supceded By Date                : nulldate
Topic Focused Id                : TRANE|EN
Topic Related Id                : TRN-FLD|STARTUP|SERVICER|SERV|OPER|INST|BLD-OPER
Unit Flag                       : T

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Trane Uni Fan Coil And Force Flo Installation Maintenance Manual UNT SVX07D EN (27 Apr 2012)

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation